Brother Sewing Machine PE 600II User Manual

EMBROIDERY MACHINE  
PR-600  
O P E R A T I O N M A N U A L  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FOR USERS IN THE UK, EIRE, MALTA AND CYPRUS ONLY  
If this machine is fitted with a three-pin non-rewireable BS plug, then please read the following.  
IMPORTANT  
If the available socket outlet is not suitable for the plug supplied with this equipment, it should be cut  
off and an appropriate three-pin plug fitted. With alternative plugs, an approved fuse must be fitted in  
the plug.  
NOTE  
The plug served from the main lead must be destroyed as a plug with bared flexible cords is  
hazardous if engaged in a live socket outlet. In the event that the plug fuse must be replaced, use a  
fuse approved by ASTA to BS 1362, i.e. carrying the  
mark, rating as marked on plug.  
Always replace the fuse cover, never use plugs with the fuse cover omitted.  
WARNING  
DO NOT CONNECT EITHER WIRE TO THE EARTH TERMINAL WHICH IS MARKED WITH THE  
LETTER ‘E’, BY THE EARTH SYMBOL  
OR COLOURED GREEN OR GREEN AND YELLOW.  
The wires in this main lead are coloured in accordance with the following code:  
Blue  
Neutral  
Live  
Brown  
As the colours of the wiring in the main lead of this appliance may not correspond with the coloured  
markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows.  
The wire that is coloured blue must be connected to the terminal that is marked with the letter ‘N’ or  
coloured black or blue.  
The wire that is coloured brown must be connected to the terminal that is marked with the letter ‘L’  
or coloured red or brown.  
ii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Declaration of  
Conformity (For USA Only)  
Responsible Party: Brother International Corporation  
100 Somerset Corporate Boulevard  
Bridgewater, NJ 08807-0911 USA  
TEL : (908) 704-1700  
declares that the product  
Product Name:  
Model Number:  
Brother Sewing Machine  
PR-600II  
complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this  
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference  
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,  
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection  
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can  
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions,  
may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that  
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful  
interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off  
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following  
measures:  
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna  
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is  
connected.  
• Consult the retailer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
• The enclosed interface cable should be used in order to ensure compliance with the limits for a  
Class B digital device.  
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Brother Industries, Ltd. could void the user's  
authority to operate the equipment.  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THANK YOU FOR CHOOSING OUR MACHINE  
Your machine is one of the most advanced computerized household embroidery machines. To fully  
enjoy all the features available, we suggest that you study the manual before using the machine.  
PLEASE READ BEFORE USING THIS MACHINE  
For safe operation  
1. Be sure to keep your eye on the needle while sewing. Do not touch the handwheel, thread take-  
up lever, needle, or other moving parts.  
2. Remember to turn off the power switch and unplug the cord when:  
Operation is completed  
Replacing or removing the needle or any other parts  
A power failure occurs during use  
Maintaining the machine  
Leaving the machine unattended  
3. Plug the machine directly into the wall. Do not use extension cords.  
For a longer service life  
1. When storing this machine, avoid direct sunlight and high humidity locations. Do not use or  
store the machine near a space heater, iron, halogen lamp, or other hot objects.  
2. Use only neutral soaps or detergents to clean the machine. Benzene, thinner, and scouring  
powders can damage the machine, and should never be used.  
3. Do not drop or hit the machine.  
4. Always consult the manual when replacing or installing any assemblies, needle, or other parts to  
assure correct installation.  
For repair or adjustment  
In the event a malfunction occurs or adjustment is required, first follow the troubleshooting table at  
the back of this Operation Manual to inspect and adjust the machine yourself. If the problem persists,  
consult your local authorized Brother dealer.  
For additional product information and updates, visit our web site at www.brother.com  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
License Agreement  
The enclosed machine includes data, software and/or documentation (collectively “CONTENT”) that  
are proprietary products of Brother Industries, Ltd. ("BROTHER"). BY USING THE CONTENT, THE  
CUSTOMER ACCEPTS THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. BROTHER retains  
ownership of all rights to CONTENT and to the copies of the CONTENT included in this package.  
The CONTENT are licensed (not sold) to you (“CUSTOMER”) under the terms and conditions of this  
Agreement.  
CUSTOMER is licensed to:  
Use the CONTENT in combination with an embroidery machine to create embroidery.  
Use the CONTENT in combination with an embroidery machine that CUSTOMER owns or uses,  
provided that the CONTENT is not used on more than one embroidery machine at a time.  
Except as otherwise provided herein, CUSTOMER may not:  
Allow more than one copy of the CONTENT to be available for use at any one time.  
Reproduce, modify, publish, distribute, sell, rent, sublicense or otherwise make available to  
others CONTENT.  
Distribute, rent, sublicense, lease, sell, transfer or assign the media card or CONTENT.  
Decompile, disassemble or otherwise reverse engineer the CONTENT or assist others to do the  
same.  
Alter, translate, modify or adapt the CONTENT or any part thereof for business, commercial or  
industrial purposes.  
Sell or otherwise distribute the EMBROIDERY created by use of the CONTENT, WHICH  
ORIGINALLY BEARS CERTAIN COPYRIGHT NOTICE UNDER THE NAME OF ANY THIRD  
PARTIES OTHER THAN BROTHER (e.g. “©DISNEY”).  
BROTHER retains all rights not expressly granted to CUSTOMER herein.  
Nothing in this agreement constitutes a waiver of the rights of BROTHER under any law. This  
agreement shall be governed by the laws of Japan.  
Please direct all inquiries concerning this Agreement in writing by regular mail, to Brother Industries,  
Ltd., 1-1-1 Kawagishi, Mizuho-ku, Nagoya 467-8562, Japan, Attention: P&H company Sales and  
Marketing Dept.  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Warning Labels  
The following warning labels are on the machine.  
Be sure to observe the precautions described in the labels.  
1
2
Label locations  
Please put a drop of oil  
onto the hook once a day  
before use.  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Precautions  
Concerning optional embroidery cards  
Do not disassemble or alter the embroidery cards.  
Do not forcefully bend, drop, scratch or place heavy objects on top of the embroidery cards.  
Do not allow the embroidery cards to become wet, such as with water, solvents, drinks or any  
other liquids.  
Do not use or store the embroidery cards in a location exposed to strong static electricity or  
electrical interference.  
Do not use or store embroidery cards in locations exposed to vibrations or impacts, direct  
sunlight, extreme dust (or lint), high temperatures, high humidity, severe temperature  
fluctuations, or strong magnetic forces (such as from speakers).  
While embroidery data is being recalled from the embroidery card, do not allow the machine to  
be exposed to vibrations or impacts, and do not attempt to remove the embroidery card from the  
machine.  
Store embroidery cards in their protective cases.  
If an embroidery card other than our original embroidery cards are used, the embroidery  
machine may not operate correctly. Be sure to use only recommended embroidery cards.  
Some licensed or copyright embroidery cards cannot be used with this embroidery machine.  
Embroidery cards sold overseas cannot be used with this embroidery machine.  
Only insert or remove embroidery cards while  
appears in the display or while the  
embroidery machine is turned off (see page 112).  
Concerning USB media  
Do not disassemble or alter the USB media.  
Do not allow the USB media to become wet, such as with water, solvents, drinks or any other  
liquids.  
Do not use or store the USB media in a location exposed to strong static electricity or electrical  
interference.  
Do not use or store USB media in locations exposed to vibrations or impacts, direct sunlight,  
extreme dust (or lint), high temperatures, high humidity, severe temperature fluctuations, or  
strong magnetic forces (such as from speakers).  
While embroidery data is being recalled from the USB media, do not allow the machine to be exposed  
to vibrations or impacts, and do not attempt to remove the USB media from the machine.  
Some USB media may not be usable with this machine. Please visit our web site for more details.  
Only insert or remove USB media while  
appears in the display, or when prompted to  
change media by a message on the display (see page 137).  
For additional information, refer to the instruction manual included with the USB media that you  
have purchased.  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
——————————————————————————————————————————————————————————  
Machine Structure and Features  
The thread colors assigned to the needle bars are  
listed on the screen. Thread the needle bars as  
indicated.  
Six-needle machine  
embroidering  
Your machine has six needles, each threaded with a  
different color of thread. It can sew embroidery  
patterns that contain several colors by automatically  
selecting the appropriate needle for each color.  
The mechanism that moves the needles up and  
down is called the needle bar, and the needle bars  
are in the needle bar case. The needle bars are  
named from right to left: needle bar 1, needle bar 2,  
needle bar 3, needle bar 4 , needle bar 5, and needle  
bar 6.  
1 The threads threaded on the needle bars are  
indicated as shown here.  
The spool pins, thread tension knobs, thread take-up  
levers and thread paths, mentioned when threading  
the upper thread, are different according to their  
corresponding needle bar number.  
3
1
2
1 Needle bar 1  
2 Needle 1  
3 Needle bar case  
The machine automatically assigns a thread color to  
each needle. If a needle is already threaded by a  
color that will be used on the next pattern the  
machine will assign the color to that needle,  
reducing the number of thread spool changes. This  
also means that the machine does not always assign  
colors according to the needle number, it assigns  
colors based on the currently threaded colors.  
Memo  
Sewing is not necessarily performed in the  
order of the needle bar numbers.  
viii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Not all six needles can be used to sew at the same  
time. Only one needle is moved to the embroidering  
position at a time. According to the sewing order, the  
needle bar case is moved to the left and right so that  
the needle bar and needle thread with the required  
color can be moved to the embroidering position.  
Differences with single-needle  
machines  
Can sew embroidery patterns using six or less  
colors without the need to replace the thread  
spools  
With single-needle machines, the thread spool  
must be changed and the machine must be  
threaded each time a different thread color is  
used. With this machine, it is not necessary to  
change the thread spool or rethread the machine  
with embroidery patterns containing six or less  
colors. If total colors are less than 6 colors, and if  
total color change is more than 7 times, machine  
will come back to the needle that the machine is  
already used and sew the same color again  
automatically.  
1
2
Automatic sewing reduces sewing time  
Except to change the thread spools with patterns  
containing seven or more colors, once the  
machine is started, it continues to operate  
automatically, from lowering the presser foot to  
performing the specified operations at the starting  
and end positions in addition to changing the  
thread colors. Since the machine can change  
threads and finish stitching, sewing time is  
reduced.  
1 Needle at the embroidering position  
The needle is positioned over the hole in the  
needle plate 2.  
When starting the machine, the presser foot is  
automatically lowered, and the embroidery is sewn  
while performing pulling thread from the materials at  
the thread trimming and while changing thread  
colors (moving the needle to be sewn within the  
embroidering). When sewing is finished, the  
machine stops. If the pattern uses seven or more  
thread colors, the machine will stop when it is  
necessary for the thread spools to be changed, and  
the corresponding instructions appear on the LCD.  
Automatically pulls and holds the thread tails to  
the under side of fabric at the beginning and end  
of stitching  
Since the machine automatically pulls the upper  
thread under the fabric at the beginning of a  
color, and pulls the upper thread from the fabric  
at the time of thread trimming, you don’t need to  
deal with the upper thread tail at all.  
Automatically moves the embroidery frame to  
the embroidering position  
With single-needle machine, in most cases, the  
embroidery pattern is centered in the frame and  
the fabric must be correctly positioned within the  
embroidery frame with the center of the desired  
embroidering position aligned with the center of  
the embroidery frame. However, with this  
machine, the embroidery frame is moved to  
determine the embroidering position, making it  
easier to sew the pattern at any place in the frame.  
In addition, the embroidering position can be  
freely determined after the fabric is hooped and  
the embroidery frame is attached to the machine,  
regardless of how the fabric is positioned in the  
embroidery frame.  
Machine Structure and Features ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
——————————————————————————————————————————————————————————  
Expanded thread color display feature enables  
colors to be displayed in almost the true color  
The colors and thread color numbers are stored in  
the machine’s memory. From this thread color  
Other features  
Easy-to-read and easy-to-use LCD  
Equipped with a large color LCD, the colors of an  
library, you can select colors to create your own  
embroidery pattern can be previewed in a nearly  
color thread table. If the pattern colors are  
realistic image. In addition, since the LCD is a  
changed using this table, the pattern can be  
touch panel, the keys that are displayed can be  
displayed with only the thread colors that you  
touched to easily perform operations.  
have. In addition, the embroidery pattern can be  
displayed as it would appear after it is  
embroidered.  
Safety mechanism  
Automatic needle-threading mechanism  
Using the automatic needle-threading  
The machine is equipped with a locking  
mechanism that helps prevent injuries from  
accidental operation. The machine can only be  
started after the machine is unlocked. The color of  
the start/stop button changes to inform you of  
whether or not the machine is locked.  
mechanism, the needle can easily be threaded.  
Lit in red  
Flashing in green  
The machine is  
locked.  
The machine can be  
started.  
Wide selection of built-in thread color  
information  
The thread color information for manufacturers’  
threads is available, making it easy to choose the  
appropriate thread color.  
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
USB Type “B” (function) port connector  
available as standard equipment  
Available features  
If a computer is connected to the machine  
through the included USB cable, embroidery  
patterns can be recalled from the computer.  
Designs with a maximum size of 200 mm (H) ×  
300 mm (W) (7-7/8 inches (H) × 11-3/4 inches (W))  
can be embroidered. If the optional cap frame is  
used, embroidery can be sewn on caps.  
Various built-in patterns  
In addition to the many lettering patterns,  
embroidery patterns and frame patterns built into  
the machine, if an optional embroidery card is  
used, many more embroidery patterns are  
available.  
Embroidery pattern editing  
Lettering and embroidery patterns can be  
combined or a text arrangement can be specified  
to arrange the patterns.  
The machine can also be set to repeatedly sew the  
same pattern.  
Machine Structure and Features xi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
——————————————————————————————————————————————————————————  
Manual Structure  
This manual is constructed as described below.  
Read before use  
Searching for information  
Chapter 1: Getting Ready  
Searching the manual  
The setup of the embroidery machine and the  
various preparations required before starting to sew  
are described in this chapter.  
By title  
Check the descriptions at the left for the contents  
of each chapter, and then check the table of  
contents.  
Chapter 2: Embroidering Tutorial  
This chapter describes the basic embroidering  
operations in order—from turning on the machine  
and sewing a pattern to finishing sewing. Follow the  
steps of the tutorial to embroider a pattern and  
master the operation of this embroidery machine.  
Chapter 3: Other Basic Procedures  
This chapter provides explanations on operations  
other than those described in chapter 2, such as  
when sewing a pattern with seven or more colors,  
and other necessary operations, for example, to  
change the needle.  
For basic operations, refer to the list of titles on  
the first page of chapter 2. Find the appropriate  
page by using the thumbtabs on the right edge of  
the pages.  
By keyword  
Search the index at the end of this manual. Look  
for the desired keyword, and then refer to the  
page that is indicated.  
By screen  
Descriptions of the keys and other information  
that appear in the main LCD screens are provided  
in the tables on pages 49 to 57. For details, refer  
to the page that is indicated.  
Read when additional  
information is required  
By condition  
Various possible conditions and the  
corresponding operations are described on  
page 58. For details, refer to the page that is  
indicated.  
Chapter 4: Embroidering Settings  
This chapter contains descriptions on the various  
embroidering settings, which make editing patterns  
simple.  
Chapter 5: Selecting/Editing/Saving Patterns  
This chapter provides details on selecting, editing  
and saving embroidery patterns.  
Chapter 6: Basic Settings and Help Feature  
This chapter contains descriptions on the use of the  
settings key, the machine operations key and the  
help key. Details on changing the basic embroidery  
machine settings and viewing operations on the LCD  
will be provided.  
Searching the machine  
This machine is equipped with a help feature.  
Learning how to perform an operation  
Touch the machine operations guide key, and  
then check for the desired information. For details  
on using the machine operations guide key, refer  
to page 151.  
Learning how to use a screen feature  
Touch the help key, and then check for the  
desired information. For details on using the help  
key, refer to page 153.  
Chapter 7: Appendix  
This chapter provides descriptions of techniques for  
various embroidering operations, pointers for  
creating beautiful embroidery, and details on  
maintenance procedures and corrective measures  
that should be taken when a problem occurs.  
xii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Important Safety Instructions................................................................................................i  
License Agreement ............................................................................................................... v  
Warning Labels.................................................................................................................... vi  
Precautions......................................................................................................................... vii  
Concerning optional embroidery cards ............................................................................................................ vii  
Concerning USB media.................................................................................................................................... vii  
Machine Structure and Features........................................................................................ viii  
Six-needle machine embroidering................................................................................................................... viii  
Differences with single-needle machines .......................................................................................................... ix  
Other features .................................................................................................................................................... x  
Available features.............................................................................................................................................. xi  
Manual Structure................................................................................................................ xii  
Read before use ............................................................................................................................................... xii  
Read when additional information is required.................................................................................................. xii  
Searching for information................................................................................................................................. xii  
Contents............................................................................................................................ xiii  
GETTING READY  
1
Names of Machine Parts and Their Functions ......................................................................2  
Front view.......................................................................................................................................................... 2  
Right-side/rear view ........................................................................................................................................... 3  
Operation panel................................................................................................................................................. 3  
Included Accessories............................................................................................................4  
Accessories ........................................................................................................................................................ 4  
Optional Accessories............................................................................................................5  
Setting Up the Machine........................................................................................................6  
Setup and transporting precautions .................................................................................................................... 6  
Setup location.................................................................................................................................................... 7  
Setting up the machine....................................................................................................................................... 8  
Adjusting the operation panel position............................................................................................................... 9  
Preparing the thread guide assembly................................................................................................................ 10  
Positioning the spool stand............................................................................................................................... 11  
Attaching the embroidery frame holder............................................................................................................ 11  
EMBROIDERING TUTORIAL  
13  
Operating Precautions........................................................................................................14  
Power supply precautions ................................................................................................................................ 14  
Needle precautions.......................................................................................................................................... 15  
Checking the needle ........................................................................................................................................ 15  
Bobbin precautions.......................................................................................................................................... 15  
Upper thread recommendations....................................................................................................................... 16  
Fabric recommendations.................................................................................................................................. 16  
Display recommendations................................................................................................................................ 16  
Basic Procedures ................................................................................................................17  
Installing the Bobbin ..........................................................................................................18  
Removing the bobbin case............................................................................................................................... 18  
Installing the bobbin ........................................................................................................................................ 19  
Installing the bobbin case................................................................................................................................. 19  
Turning ON the Machine ...................................................................................................20  
Understanding the screens ............................................................................................................................... 21  
Screen overview............................................................................................................................................... 22  
Selecting an Embroidery Pattern ........................................................................................23  
Selecting an embroidery pattern....................................................................................................................... 24  
Editing the Embroidery Pattern...........................................................................................25  
Continuing to the embroidering settings screen................................................................................................ 25  
Specifying Embroidering Setting.........................................................................................26  
xiii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
——————————————————————————————————————————————————————————  
Previewing the Image.........................................................................................................27  
Checking a preview image............................................................................................................................... 27  
Hooping the Fabric in the Embroidery Frame.....................................................................28  
Hooping the fabric in the embroidery frame..................................................................................................... 28  
Attaching the Embroidery Frame to the Machine...............................................................30  
Attaching the embroidery frame....................................................................................................................... 30  
Checking the Embroidery Area...........................................................................................32  
Continuing to the embroidering screen ............................................................................................................ 32  
Upper Threading ................................................................................................................33  
Checking the needle bars and thread colors..................................................................................................... 33  
Upper threading............................................................................................................................................... 35  
Threading the needle ....................................................................................................................................... 39  
Sewing the Embroidery.......................................................................................................42  
Starting embroidering....................................................................................................................................... 42  
Stopping embroidering..................................................................................................................................... 44  
Checking the Thread Tension .............................................................................................45  
Removing the Embroidery Frame and Fabric......................................................................46  
Removing the embroidery frame ...................................................................................................................... 46  
Removing the fabric......................................................................................................................................... 46  
Turning OFF the Machine...................................................................................................47  
Screen Quick Reference Guide ..........................................................................................49  
Key displays..................................................................................................................................................... 49  
Common screen controls ................................................................................................................................. 49  
Understanding the pattern type selection screen .............................................................................................. 50  
Understanding the pattern list screen ............................................................................................................... 51  
Understanding the pattern editing screen ......................................................................................................... 52  
Understanding the embroidering settings screen .............................................................................................. 54  
Understanding the embroidering screen........................................................................................................... 56  
When You Have a Question, This May Help You...............................................................58  
TECHNICAL TERMS:........................................................................................................................................ 58  
PATTERNS: ...................................................................................................................................................... 59  
EMBROIDERING: ............................................................................................................................................ 59  
OTHER BASIC PROCEDURES  
61  
Resume the Operation Being Performed Before the Machine Was Turned OFF.................62  
Changing the Needle..........................................................................................................63  
Replacing the needle........................................................................................................................................ 63  
Correctly Using the Embroidery Frames.............................................................................65  
Embroidery frame types and applications......................................................................................................... 65  
Attaching Iron-On Stabilizer (Backing) to Fabric ...............................................................66  
Hooping the Fabric.............................................................................................................67  
Hooping the fabric in the extra-large and large embroidery frames .................................................................. 67  
Using the embroidery sheet.............................................................................................................................. 68  
Large/small pieces of fabric .............................................................................................................................. 69  
Embroidery Frame Position and Movement........................................................................70  
Changing the Embroidering Position ..................................................................................72  
Adjusting the angle .......................................................................................................................................... 73  
Embroidering a Pattern Containing Seven or More Colors .................................................75  
Checking if thread spool changes are necessary............................................................................................... 75  
Changing the Thread Spools with Designs of Seven or More Colors ..................................77  
Change thread spools message......................................................................................................................... 77  
Easily changing the thread spools..................................................................................................................... 78  
If the Thread Breaks or the Bobbin Thread Runs Out While Embroidering ........................79  
If the upper thread breaks................................................................................................................................. 79  
If the bobbin thread breaks or runs out............................................................................................................. 80  
Embroidering From the Beginning or Middle of the Pattern ...............................................81  
Resume Embroidering After Turning OFF the Machine ......................................................83  
Adjusting the Thread Tension.............................................................................................85  
Adjusting the tension of the bobbin thread....................................................................................................... 85  
Adjusting the tension of the upper thread......................................................................................................... 86  
xiv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EMBROIDERING SETTINGS  
87  
Automatic Lock Stitch Setting ............................................................................................88  
Starting/Ending Position Settings........................................................................................89  
Repeatedly sewing a pattern along a diagonal.................................................................................................. 90  
Maximum Sewing Speed Setting.........................................................................................91  
Setting the Machine to Stop at Color Changes ...................................................................92  
Stopping the machine at the next color change................................................................................................ 92  
Specifying pause locations before embroidering............................................................................................... 92  
Temporary Needle Bar Setting ...........................................................................................94  
Reserved Needle Bar Settings.............................................................................................96  
SELECTING/EDITING/SAVING PATTERNS  
99  
Embroidery Data Precautions...........................................................................................100  
Selecting an Embroidery Pattern ......................................................................................102  
General pattern selection ............................................................................................................................... 102  
Embroidery patterns ....................................................................................................................................... 104  
Renaissance Alphabet Patterns....................................................................................................................... 105  
Floral alphabet patterns.................................................................................................................................. 106  
Appliqué alphabet.......................................................................................................................................... 107  
Frame patterns ............................................................................................................................................... 108  
Alphabet patterns........................................................................................................................................... 109  
Embroidery patterns stored in the machine..................................................................................................... 111  
Embroidery cards (optional) ........................................................................................................................... 112  
Computer (USB)............................................................................................................................................. 114  
USB media (Commercially Available) ............................................................................................................ 117  
Editing the Embroidery Pattern (Pattern Editing Screen) ..................................................119  
Combining patterns........................................................................................................................................ 119  
Selecting the pattern to be edited ................................................................................................................... 120  
Moving a pattern............................................................................................................................................ 120  
Flipping a pattern horizontally ....................................................................................................................... 121  
Flipping a pattern vertically............................................................................................................................ 121  
Changing the size of a pattern........................................................................................................................ 121  
Rotating a pattern........................................................................................................................................... 122  
Changing the text arrangement of a character ................................................................................................ 123  
Changing the character spacing ..................................................................................................................... 124  
Changing the thread density (only for some character and frame patterns) ..................................................... 125  
Specifying multi-color text ............................................................................................................................. 126  
Changing the colors of the pattern.................................................................................................................. 127  
Deleting a pattern .......................................................................................................................................... 128  
Editing the Embroidery Pattern (Embroidering Settings Screen) .......................................129  
Rotating the entire pattern.............................................................................................................................. 129  
Creating a repeating pattern ........................................................................................................................... 130  
Changing the colors of the pattern.................................................................................................................. 131  
Editing a Combined Pattern..............................................................................................132  
Saving Embroidery Patterns..............................................................................................136  
Machine’s Memory ........................................................................................................................................ 136  
If the Embroidery Pattern Cannot Be Saved .................................................................................................... 136  
USB Media (Commercially Available) ............................................................................................................ 137  
BASIC SETTINGS AND HELP FEATURE  
139  
Using the Settings Key......................................................................................................140  
Understanding the settings screen .................................................................................................................. 140  
Adjusting the brightness of the LCD ............................................................................................................... 142  
Turning the buzzer on or off........................................................................................................................... 142  
Changing the language................................................................................................................................... 143  
Changing the units of measurements.............................................................................................................. 143  
Changing the display guides........................................................................................................................... 143  
Changing the thread color information........................................................................................................... 145  
Display expanded thread color ...................................................................................................................... 146  
Custom thread table settings........................................................................................................................... 147  
xv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
——————————————————————————————————————————————————————————  
Specifying jumpstitch trimming / “DST” jump codes for trimming.................................................................. 149  
Deleting short stitches.................................................................................................................................... 150  
Specifying the remaining length of thread ...................................................................................................... 150  
Using the Machine Operations Guide Key .......................................................................151  
Using the Help Key...........................................................................................................153  
APPENDIX  
155  
Appliqué Sewing...............................................................................................................156  
Sewing appliqué patterns ............................................................................................................................... 156  
Using a frame pattern to create appliqués (1) ................................................................................................. 157  
Using a frame pattern to create appliqués (2) ................................................................................................. 158  
Helpful Tips for the Operation of PR-600II ......................................................................160  
Checking the thread tension of built-in patterns ............................................................................................. 160  
Sewing a pattern aligned with a mark on the fabric ........................................................................................ 161  
Color thread table .......................................................................................................................................... 163  
Colors of Tajima (.dst) embroidery data.......................................................................................................... 163  
Creating Beautiful Embroidery .........................................................................................164  
Threads.......................................................................................................................................................... 164  
Stabilizers (Backing)....................................................................................................................................... 165  
Hooping Techniques...................................................................................................................................... 166  
Fabric/stabilizer compatibility chart ............................................................................................................... 167  
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES  
Attaching an optional embroidery frame for industrial embroidery machines .................168  
Using the Optional Cap Frame.........................................................................................169  
Cap frame and its accessories......................................................................................................................... 169  
Types of caps ................................................................................................................................................. 170  
Fabric precautions.......................................................................................................................................... 171  
Preparing to use the cap frame....................................................................................................................... 171  
Attaching the standard cap frame to the mounting jig and putting a cap into the frame.................................. 176  
Attaching the advanced cap frame to the mounting jig and putting a cap into the frame ................................ 180  
Installing the embroidery frame holder........................................................................................................... 185  
Additional digitizing information.................................................................................................................... 186  
Using the Optional Bobbin Winder..................................................................................188  
Precautions .................................................................................................................................................... 188  
Optional bobbin winder and its accessories................................................................................................... 188  
Setting up the optional bobbin winder ........................................................................................................... 189  
Connecting the AC adapter ............................................................................................................................ 189  
Winding the bobbin....................................................................................................................................... 190  
Maintenance.....................................................................................................................193  
Cleaning the LCD........................................................................................................................................... 193  
Cleaning the machine surface ........................................................................................................................ 193  
Cleaning the hook.......................................................................................................................................... 193  
Cleaning around the needle plate................................................................................................................... 194  
Cleaning the bobbin case............................................................................................................................... 195  
Oiling the machine ........................................................................................................................................ 196  
Troubleshooting ...............................................................................................................198  
On-screen troubleshooting............................................................................................................................. 198  
Troubleshooting............................................................................................................................................. 199  
Error messages ............................................................................................................................................... 207  
If the LCD cannot be read .............................................................................................................................. 213  
If the machine does not respond when a key is pressed.................................................................................. 213  
Specifications ...................................................................................................................215  
Embroidery machine specifications................................................................................................................ 215  
Index ................................................................................................................................216  
xvi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
GETTING READY  
After unpacking the PR-600II, first refer to “Included Accessories” on page 4, and  
check that all listed accessories are included. After checking that all accessories are  
included, the embroidery machine can be set up.  
The setup of the PR-600II and the various preparations required before starting to sew  
are described in this chapter.  
Names of Machine Parts and Their Functions ...........................................................2  
Front view / 2  
Right-side/rear view / 3  
Operation panel / 3  
Included Accessories.................................................................................................4  
Accessories / 4  
Optional Accessories.................................................................................................5  
Setting Up the Machine.............................................................................................6  
Setup and transporting precautions / 6  
Setting up the machine / 8  
Setup location / 7  
Adjusting the operation panel position / 9  
Positioning the spool stand / 11  
Preparing the thread guide assembly / 10  
Attaching the embroidery frame holder / 11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GETTING READY ———————————————————————————————————————————————————  
Names of Machine Parts and Their Functions  
The names of the various parts of the sewing machine and their functions are described below. Before using the  
sewing machine, carefully read these descriptions to learn the names of the machine parts.  
Front view  
6
7
1
8
C
2
9
B
D
6 5 4 3 2 1  
3
A
4
5
0
1 Thread tension knobs  
6 Thread guide  
Adjusts the tension of the thread.  
7 Thread guide assembly support  
2 Needle bar case  
8 Spool stand  
The case moves to the left and right to move the needle  
to the embroidering position.  
Put 6 thread spools to embroider.  
9 Operation panel  
3 Carriage  
0 Feet  
Attach the embroidery frame to the carriage. When the  
machine is turned on or when the machine does  
embroidery, the carriage moves forward, backward, left  
and right.  
Use the feet to adjust the height of the legs.  
A Sewing light  
B Thread guide pins  
C Upper thread guide  
D Middle thread guide  
4 Lower thread guide  
5 Hook cover/Hook  
Open the hook cover, and then insert the bobbin case  
into the hook.  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Right-side/rear view  
1
Bottom  
5 Power supply plug  
1 USB Type “A” (host) port connector  
When using USB media, plug the USB media into the  
USB Type “A” (host) port connector.  
Insert the plug on the power supply cord into the power  
supply plug.  
6 Main power switch  
2 Embroidery card slot  
Use the main power switch to turn the machine ON (I)  
and OFF ({).  
Insert the embroidery cards (sold separately) into the  
embroidery card slot.  
7 Ventilation slots  
3 Handwheel  
Rotate the handwheel to move the needle up and down.  
Be sure to rotate the handwheel counterclockwise.  
4 USB Type “B” (function) port connector  
When sending patterns from a computer to the  
machine, plug the USB cable from the computer into  
the USB Type “B” (function) port connector.  
Operation panel  
1
2
3
4
1 Start/stop button  
2 Thread trimming button  
Press the start/stop button to start or stop machine. The  
lighting status and color of the button changes  
Press the thread trimming button to trim both the upper  
and the bobbin threads.  
depending on the operation condition of the machine.  
3 Automatic needle-threading button  
Press the automatic needle threading button to thread  
the needle.  
Lit in red  
: When the machine cannot start  
sewing  
Flashing in green: When the machine can start  
sewing  
4 LCD (touch panel)  
Touch the keys that appear on the touch panel to select  
and edit patterns and confirm various information.  
Lit in green  
Off  
: While the machine is sewing  
: When the machine is turned off  
Names of Machine Parts and Their Functions  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GETTING READY ———————————————————————————————————————————————————  
Included Accessories  
After opening the box, check that the following accessories are included. If any item is missing or damaged,  
contact your retailer.  
Accessories  
The accessories listed below are included with this machine. Make sure to use the accessories supplied with this  
machine.  
1.  
4.  
2.  
5.  
3.  
Model  
Name  
No.  
Part Name  
Accessory case  
Needle set (2 pcs.)  
Prewound bobbin (6 pcs.)  
Spool net (6 pcs.)  
Seam ripper  
Scissors  
Tweezers  
Touch pen  
Needle changing tool (Threader)  
Parts Code  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
XC6482-051  
PRHA1BR11 XC6469-001  
XC6368-051  
S34455-000  
X54243-051  
XC1807-121  
XC6542-051  
XA9940-051  
XC4957-051  
XC6499-151  
XC6543-051  
X55468-051  
XC5159-051  
XC6545-051  
XC1074-051  
XC6159-051  
XZ0206-051  
X59476-051  
XC5974-151  
XD1563-051  
6.  
7.  
8.  
9.  
10.  
11.  
12.  
10 Needle plate spacer  
11 Phillips screwdriver  
12 Standard screwdriver  
13 Allen screwdriver  
14 Offset screwdriver  
15 Disc-shaped screwdriver  
16 Wrench 13 x 10  
17 Oiler  
13.  
16.  
14.  
17.  
15.  
18.  
18 Clean brush  
19 Weight  
20 USB cable  
Embroidery frame (extra large)  
21 200 mm (H) × 300 mm (W)  
(7-7/8 inches (H) × 11-3/4 inches (W))  
Embroidery frame (large)  
22 130 mm (H) × 180 mm (W)  
(5-1/8 inches (H) × 7-1/8 inches (W))  
Embroidery frame (medium)  
23 100 mm (H) × 100 mm (W)  
(4 inches (H) × 4 inches (W))  
Embroidery frame (small)  
24 40 mm (H) × 60 mm (W)  
(1-1/2 inches (H) × 2-3/8 inches (W))  
Embroidery sheet (extra large)  
25 200 mm (H) × 300 mm (W)  
(7-7/8 inches (H) × 11-3/4 inches (W))  
Embroidery sheet (large)  
26 130 mm (H) × 180 mm (W)  
(5-1/8 inches (H) × 7-1/8 inches (W))  
Embroidery sheet (medium)  
27 100 mm (H) × 100 mm (W)  
(4 inches (H) × 4 inches (W))  
Embroidery sheet (small)  
28 40 mm (H) × 60 mm (W)  
(1-1/2 inches (H) × 2-3/8 inches (W))  
PRH300 XC6284-052  
PRH180 XC6285-052  
PRH100 XC6286-052  
19.  
22.  
25.  
20.  
23.  
26.  
21.  
24.  
27.  
30.  
PRH60  
XC6287-052  
XC5704-051  
XC5721-051  
XC5759-051  
XC5761-051  
28.  
31.  
29.  
32  
29 Operation manual  
30 Quick reference guide  
31 Spool mat (6pcs.)  
32 Spool cap (6pcs.)  
XD1133-051  
XD0754-051  
XC7134-051  
130012-054  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Optional Accessories  
The following are available as optional accessories.  
1.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
5.  
1
1. Advanced cap  
frame set  
2. Standard  
cap frame  
3. Advanced  
cap frame  
4. Hooping jig  
Model name:  
PRCFJ2  
5. Bobbin winder set  
Model Name: PRBW1  
Model Name: PRCF2  
Parts Code: XC7609-052  
Model Name:  
PRCFH1  
Parts Code:  
XC6958-052  
Model name:  
PRCFH2  
Parts Code:  
XC7610-052  
Parts Code: XC6290-052  
XC6290-061(for Australia)  
(See instructions on page 188.)  
Parts Code:  
XC7611-052  
(See instructions on page 169.)  
6. Embroidery card  
Note  
The parts code may be differ depending on the  
area where the machine was purchased.  
Embroidery cards sold overseas are not  
compatible with this embroidery machine.  
Model  
Name  
Model  
No.  
Part Name  
Alphabet  
Parts Code  
No.  
Part Name  
Parts Code  
Name  
1
2
SA298 X58317-003  
SA299 X58321-003  
SA307 X59567-003  
SA311 XA0257-001  
SA312 XA0275-001  
SA313 XA0517-003  
SA314 XA1223-003  
SA316 XA1406-003  
SA319 XA2452-001  
SA320 XA2869-003  
SA325 XA3791-003  
SA327 XA4289-003  
SA328 XA4502-003  
SA329 XA4664-003  
SA330 XA4771-003  
SA331 XA5037-003  
SA332 XA5386-001  
SA333 XA5567-003  
SA335 XA5629-003  
SA336 XA5659-003  
SA337 XA5753-003  
SA338 XA5781-001  
SA339 XA5978-001  
SA340 XA6111-001  
SA341 XA6586-003  
SA342 XA6733-003  
SA343 XA6769-003  
SA344 XA6849-003  
45 Fancy Work  
47 Butterfly  
49 Folk Art  
50 Fairy & Floral  
51 Paper Dolls  
52 Bear Collections  
53 Scene  
54 Tea Time  
55 Gardening  
56 Asian  
57 Large Christmas  
58 New Quilt Traditions  
60 Summer Fun  
61 Blouse Embellishment  
62 Zodiac Signs  
63 Bunny  
SA345 XA7770-003  
SA347 XA8206-003  
SA349 XA8348-001  
SA350 XA8414-003  
SA351 XA8563-001  
SA352 XA8511-003  
SA353 XA8936-003  
SA354 XA9129-001  
SA355 XA9348-003  
SA356 XC0025-003  
SA357 XC0057-001  
SA358 XC0861-003  
SA360 XC1168-001  
SA361 XC1304-003  
SA362 XC1502-001  
SA363 XC1646-001  
SA364 XC2176-003  
SA365 XC4220-003  
SA366 XC4819-003  
SA367 XC7048-003  
Flower  
10 Monogram Emblem  
11 Frame  
*
*
*
*
12 Transportation  
13 Sports Emblem  
14 Large Floral  
16 Dogs & Cats  
19 Marine  
20 Petite Designs  
25 Horse  
27 Birds  
*
*
*
*
28 Christmas  
29 Lace  
30 Wildlife Animals  
31 Large Flower II  
32 Musical Instrument  
33 Trees  
35 Cats & Dogs II  
36 Fruits & Vegetables  
37 Appliqué Alphabet  
38 Angel  
39 Doll Face  
40 Sports 3  
41 Renaissance Alphabet  
42 Farm  
43 Victorian  
*
*
*
64 Grand Mom  
65 Red Work  
66 Pop Mix  
67 Home Dec  
68 Cross Stitch Collection 1 SA368 XC7097-003  
69 Sport Shirt Motifs SA369 XC7274-003  
70 Cross Stitch Collection 2 SA370 XC7550-003  
71 Heir loom SA371 XC9094-003  
72 Cross Stitch Collection 3 SA372 XC9082-003  
*
*
*
73 Japanese Style  
74 Scrapbooking  
75 Lace Collection  
SA373 XC0130-003  
SA374 XD1091-003  
SA375 XD1193-003  
* Discontinued  
44 Lace2  
Memo  
Contact your nearest authorized dealer to order additional parts and optional accessories by using the  
correct part number.  
Optional Accessories  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GETTING READY ———————————————————————————————————————————————————  
Setting Up the Machine  
The procedures for setting up the machine are described below. If the machine is not set up correctly, it may  
shake or produce loud noises and the embroidery will not be sewn correctly. An optional sewing stand is also  
available.  
Setup and transporting precautions  
CAUTION  
The temperature of the operating environment should be between 5 °C (40 °F) and 40 °C  
(104 °F) . If the machine is operated in an environment that is either too cold or too hot, the  
machine may malfunction.  
Do not use the machine in a location where it will be exposed to direct sunlight, otherwise  
the machine may malfunction.  
Set up the machine with four feet completely in contact with the desk or table, so that the  
machine is level.  
Do not put anything under the embroidery machine that could block the ventilation slots at  
the bottom toward the back and do not allow lint or dust to accumulate in the ventilation  
slots, otherwise the machine’s motor may overheat, resulting in a fire or in damage to the  
machine.  
The machine weight is approximately 37 kg (81 Ibs.). The transporting or setting up of the  
embroidery machine should be performed by two people.  
When transporting the machine, be sure to lift it from the bottom at the indicated positions  
by two people. Lifting the machine from any other area may damage the machine or result in  
the machine falling, which could cause injuries.  
When lightning occurs, turn off the machine and unplug the power supply cord. Lightning  
may cause the machine to malfunction.  
Do not plug in the power supply cord until setup of the machine is completed, otherwise  
injuries may result if the start/stop button is accidentally pressed and the machine starts  
sewing.  
When lubricating the machine, wear protective eyeglasses and gloves to prevent the oil or  
grease from getting into your eyes or on your skin. Do not put the oil or grease into your  
mouth. Keep the oil and grease out of the reach of children.  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup location  
Setup the machine in a location that meets the following requirements.  
• Position machine more than 50 mm (2 inches) from the wall  
• Allow sufficient space around the machine  
• Place no objects within the moving range of the embroidery frame  
• Set-up machine near an electrical outlet  
1
• Use a level and stable surface, such as a desk  
• Use a surface that can support the weight of the machine (about 37 kg (81 Ibs.))  
• Allow open space around the ventilation slots at the bottom toward the back  
More than  
50 mm  
(2 inches)  
589 mm  
(23-3/16 inches)  
770 mm  
(30-5/16 inches)  
More than  
350 mm  
(13-3/4 inches)  
More than  
250 mm  
512 mm  
(20-5/32 inches)  
More than  
250 mm  
(9-7/8 inches)  
(9-7/8 inches)  
CAUTION  
In order to prevent malfunctions or damage, do not set up the machine in a location exposed  
to the following conditions.  
Liquids, such as water  
Direct sunlight  
Extreme dust  
Blocked ventilation  
slots  
Objects within the  
moving range of the  
embroidery frame  
Connection to extension  
cords or multiple  
Insufficient space  
adapters  
An unstable surface  
Extremely high or extremely low temperatures (The operating  
environment should be between 5 °C (40 °F) and 40 °C (104°F)  
Note  
For your safety: Since the machine weighs approximately 37 kg (81 lb.), do not set it up on an unstable  
table or desk.  
Setting Up the Machine  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GETTING READY ———————————————————————————————————————————————————  
.
Use the included wrench to turn the  
adjustable foot nut on the foot.  
4
Setting up the machine  
Turning the nut in direction 1 lengthens the  
leg; turning the nut in direction 2 shortens the  
leg.  
When setting up the machine, adjust the legs so that  
the machine is steady.  
Make sure that all packing tape affixed to the  
machine is peeled off and that all packing  
1
material is removed.  
Set up the machine while making sure that  
there is sufficient space around it.  
2
2
More than  
50 mm  
(2 inches)  
1
1
589 mm  
(23-3/16  
inches)  
1 Adjustable foot nut  
• Adjust all four legs so that they securely  
contact the desk or table.  
After adjusting the legs to the desired length,  
use the included wrench to tighten the nuts.  
More than  
350 mm  
(13-3/4 inches)  
5
More than  
250 mm  
(9-7/8 inches)  
More than  
250 mm  
(9-7/8 inches)  
512 mm  
(20-5/32 inches)  
Adjust the legs so that the machine is steady.  
Use the included wrench to loosen the lock  
nut on the leg that you wish to adjust.  
1
3
1 Lock nut  
Press down on each corner of the embroidery  
machine to check that it is stable.  
6
1
2
If it is still unstable, perform steps  
3
through  
5
again to adjust the legs.  
1 Lock nut  
2 Adjustable foot nut  
X The foot can be turned.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjust the orientation of the operation panel.  
Loosen the thumb screw, adjust the operation  
panel to an easy-to-view orientation, and then  
tighten the thumb screw.  
3
Adjusting the operation panel  
position  
Adjust the orientation and angle of the operation  
panel so it can easily be operated.  
1
Loosen 2 thumb screws to bring the operation  
1
1
panel forward.  
1
1 Thumb screw  
Adjust the angle of the operation panel.  
Loosen the 2 thumb screws behind the  
operation panel, adjust the operation panel to  
an easy-to-view angle, and then tighten the  
thumb screws.  
4
1 Thumb screws  
Adjust the operation panel to an easy-to-  
operate position, and then tighten the thumb  
1
2
screws.  
1
(Side view)  
(Top view)  
1 Thumb screws  
Note  
Using the disc-shaped screwdriver  
included, loosen and firmly tighten the five  
thumb screws.  
Setting Up the Machine  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GETTING READY ———————————————————————————————————————————————————  
Using the Phillips screwdriver, loosen the  
3
screws on the left and right sides of the thread  
Preparing the thread guide  
guide assembly and lift up the thread guide so  
that it is level.  
assembly  
Raise the thread guide assembly. Locate the included  
Phillips screwdriver.  
Using the Phillips screwdriver, loosen the  
1
screws on the left side of the thread guide  
assembly support so that the thread guide  
assembly can be raised.  
1
Remove screw 1, and then turn screw 2 three or  
four times to loosen it.  
1 Loosen Screws  
Tighten the screws on the left and right sides  
of the thread guide assembly.  
4
1 Remove the screw.  
2 Turn the screw three or four times to loosen it.  
Raise thread guide into position and tighten  
screw2 on the left. Insert screw1 into right  
side of the thread guide assembly support and  
tighten.  
2
Note  
If the screws are not loosened enough, it  
may not be easy to move the thread guide  
assembly support and the thread guide. Do  
not apply extreme force when moving the  
thread guide assembly support and the  
thread guide. Be sure that the screws are  
loosened well enough before moving these  
parts.  
Be sure to tighten each screw well enough  
that the thread guide assembly support and  
the thread guide are secured.  
1 Insert screw and tighten.  
2 Tighten screw.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Positioning the spool stand  
Attaching the embroidery  
frame holder  
Secure the spool stand in the embroidering position.  
Attach the embroidery frame holder to the carriage.  
Loosen the thumb screw, and then open up  
1
1
the spool stand to the left and right.  
Remove the two thumb screws of the  
embroidery frame holder.  
1
1
1 Thumb screws  
Align the holes in the embroidery frame  
holder with the pins on the frame-mounting  
2
plate of the carriage.  
2
1 Thumb screw  
2 Spool stand  
After the spool stand is fully opened up,  
tighten the thumb screw.  
2
X Secure the spool stand in the opened  
position.  
1 Pins on the frame-mounting plate  
2 Holes in the embroidery frame holder  
Setting Up the Machine 11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GETTING READY ———————————————————————————————————————————————————  
Secure the embroidery frame holder with the  
two thumb screws.  
3
1 Use the thumb screws removed in step  
1
.
Note  
Using the disc-shaped screwdriver  
included, firmly tighten the thumb screws.  
This completes the preparation of the machine.  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
EMBROIDERING TUTORIAL  
This chapter describes the basic embroidering operations in order—from turning on  
the machine and sewing a pattern to finishing sewing. Follow the steps of the tutorial  
to embroider a pattern and master the operation of this embroidery machine.  
Operating Precautions ............................................................................................14  
Basic Procedures.....................................................................................................17  
Screen Quick Reference Guide ...............................................................................49  
When You Have a Question, This May Help You....................................................58  
Installing the Bobbin  
Turning ON the Machine  
1
2
Selecting an Embroidery Pattern  
Editing the Embroidery Pattern  
Specifying Embroidering Setting  
Previewing the Image  
3
4
5
6
Hooping the Fabric in the Embroidery Frame  
Attaching the Embroidery Frame to the Machine  
Checking the Embroidery Area  
Upper Threading  
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
Sewing the Embroidery  
Checking the Thread Tension  
Removing the Embroidery Frame and Fabric  
Turning OFF the Machine  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EMBROIDERING TUTORIAL ——————————————————————————————————————————————  
Operating Precautions  
The necessary points to ensure the correct operation of this machine are described below.  
Power supply precautions  
Be sure to observe the following precautions concerning the power supply.  
WARNING  
Use only regular household electricity for the power source. Using other power sources may  
result in fire, electric shock, or damage to the machine.  
If any of the following occur, turn off the embroidery machine and unplug the power supply  
cord, otherwise a fire, an electric shock or damage to the machine may result.  
• When you are away from the machine.  
• After using the machine.  
• If a power outage occurs while the machine is being operated.  
• If the machine is not operating properly, for example, when there is a loose or cut connec-  
tion.  
• During electrical storms.  
CAUTION  
Do not plug this machine in with extension cords or multi-plug adapters with many other  
appliances plugged into them, otherwise a fire or an electric shock may result.  
Do not plug in or unplug the power supply cord with wet hands, otherwise an electric shock  
may result.  
When unplugging the power supply cord, be sure to first turn off the machine, and then grasp  
the plug when unplugging the cord. Pulling on the cord may damage it or result in a fire or an  
electric shock.  
Do not allow the power cord to be cut, damaged, modified, forcefully bent, pulled, twisted, or  
bundled. In addition, do not place heavy objects on the cord or expose it to heat, otherwise  
damage to the cord, fire or an electric shock may result. If the power supply cord or its plug is  
damaged, stop using the machine, and then take the machine to your nearest authorized  
retailer for repairs before continuing use.  
If the machine is not to be used for a long period of time, unplug the power supply cord,  
otherwise a fire may result.  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Needle precautions  
Be sure to observe the following precautions concerning the correct choice of needle for your machine.  
CAUTION  
Your machine is designed to use household embroidery needles. The factory recommended  
needle is “HAX 130 EBBR” (Organ). Schmetz needles 130/705 H-E may be used as a  
substitute. Use of any other needles may break the needle or thread or damage the needle-  
threading mechanism or result in injuries.  
Never use bent needles. Bent needles can easily break, possibly resulting in injuries.  
2
Checking the needle  
Sewing with a bent needle is extremely dangerous since the needle may break while the machine is being  
operated.  
Place the flat side of the needle on a flat surface and check that the distance between the needle and the flat  
surface is even. If the needle is bent or the tip of the needle is broken, replace the needle with a new one. (Refer  
to “Changing the Needle” on page 63.)  
Good needle  
Bad needle  
If the distance between the needle and  
the flat surface is not even, the needle is  
bent. Do not use a bent needle.  
Flat side  
Needle type  
marking  
Flat surface  
Flat surface  
Bobbin precautions  
Be sure to observe the following precautions concerning the bobbin.  
CAUTION  
Only use prewound bobbin (COATS “L” type/TRU-SEW POLYESTER “Filaments”) or bobbins  
designed specifically for this machine. Use of any other bobbin may result in injuries or  
damage to the machine.  
COATS  
L
Polyester  
Use a bobbin thread that has been correctly wound, otherwise the needle may break or the  
thread tension will be incorrect.  
When winding a bobbin, only use optional bobbin winder (refer to page 188) and metal  
bobbins (Parts Code: 100376-053).  
When winding the bobbin, be sure to use cotton or spun polyester bobbin thread (between 74  
dtex/2 and 100 dtex/2).  
Operating Precautions 15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EMBROIDERING TUTORIAL ——————————————————————————————————————————————  
Upper thread recommendations  
Be sure to observe the following recommendations concerning the upper thread.  
Note  
It is recommended that rayon or polyester embroidery thread be used (120 den x 2 / 135 dtex x 2 / 40  
weight (in Americas and Europe) / #50 (in Japan)).  
Fabric recommendations  
Be sure to observe the following recommendations concerning the fabric.  
Note  
Your machine can embroider fabric that is up to 1 mm (3/8 inch) thick. If thicker fabric is  
sewn, the needle may bend or break.  
When embroidering overlapping stitches, it is difficult for the needle to penetrate the fabric,  
possibly resulting in the needle bending or breaking.  
Note  
Attach stabilizers to thin or stretch fabrics. (Refer to “Attaching Iron-On Stabilizer (Backing)  
to Fabric” on page 66 for information)  
When embroidering large pieces of fabric, make sure that the fabric is not caught in the  
carriage.  
Display recommendations  
Be sure to observe the following recommendations concerning the use of the display.  
Note  
Only touch the display with your finger or included touch pen. Do not use a mechanical  
pencil, screwdriver or any other hard or sharp object. In addition, do not apply extreme  
pressure to the display screen, otherwise damage to the display screen may result.  
• All or part of the display screen may sometimes become darker or lighter due to temperature  
changes. This is not a sign of a malfunction. If the display is difficult to read, adjust its  
brightness. (Refer to “If the LCD cannot be read” on page 213.)  
• The display may be dark immediately after the embroidery machine is turned on. This is a  
normal characteristic of the backlight and is not a sign of a malfunction. After approximately  
10 minutes, the display should reach its normal level of brightness.  
• If you are not directly facing the display, the colors may be distorted or the display may be  
difficult to read. This is a normal characteristic of the display and is not a malfunction. Be sure  
to sit in front of the display while using it.  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Procedures  
Basic embroidering procedures are described below.  
Check the overall procedure below, before operating the embroidery machine.  
Operating  
Procedure  
Reference  
Page  
Tutorial  
Reference  
Page  
Procedure  
Operation  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Install the bobbin.  
p. 18  
p. 20  
p. 23  
p. 25  
p. 26  
p. 27  
p. 28  
p. 30  
p. 32  
p. 33  
p.15  
2
Turn on the machine.  
p.14, 16  
Select an embroidery pattern.  
Edit the embroidery pattern.  
Specify the embroidering settings.  
Check the previewed image.  
Hoop the fabric in the embroidery frame.  
Attach the embroidery frame to the machine.  
Check the embroidery area.  
p. 16  
p.16  
10 Thread the upper threads.  
Unlock the machine, then press the start/stop button to start  
embroidering.  
11  
p. 42  
(Once embroidering is completed, the machine automatically  
stops.)  
12 Check the thread tension.  
p. 45  
p. 46  
p. 47  
Remove the embroidery frame, and then remove the fabric from  
the frame.  
13  
14 Turn off the machine.  
(Example) Embroidery pattern  
The operations to embroider the pattern shown at the left are described on  
the following pages.  
Although embroidering can continue without the pattern being edited or  
embroidering settings being specified, refer to page 119 for details on  
editing the patterns, and refer to page 87 for details on specifying  
embroidering settings.  
Descriptions of the keys and other information that appear in the main LCD  
screens are provided in the tables on pages 49 to 57. Use these tables for  
quick reference.  
The various operating precautions that must be observed  
during the basic procedures are provided on pages 14 to 16.  
These precautions must be strictly observed in order for the  
machine to function properly. Make sure to read these  
precautions.  
Basic Procedures 17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EMBROIDERING TUTORIAL ——————————————————————————————————————————————  
1. Installing the Bobbin  
When the machine is purchased, only the bobbin case is installed in the hook. Insert a bobbin wound with  
bobbin thread for embroidering. For precautions concerning the bobbin, refer to page 15.  
Grab the bobbin case latch, and remove the  
bobbin case.  
3
Note  
The machine cannot indicate how much  
bobbin thread is remaining. Before starting  
to embroider make sure that there is enough  
bobbin thread for the pattern.  
1
Make sure to clean the bobbin case every  
time the bobbin is changed. For details on  
cleaning the bobbin case, refer to “Cleaning  
the bobbin case” on page 195.  
Removing the bobbin case  
Open the hook cover.  
Pull the hook cover toward you.  
1 Latch  
1
Oiling the machine  
After removing the bobbin case, apply oil to the  
machine. The race should be oiled. For details on  
oiling the machine, refer to “Oiling the machine”  
on page 196.  
Note  
Pull the thread picker toward you.  
Put a drop of oil onto the hook once a day  
2
before use.  
1
1 Thread Picker  
To gain access to the bobbin case easily, pull  
the thread picker toward front.  
Note  
Thread picker is a device that is used to  
hold the thread when begining to sew or  
when trimming the thread.  
CAUTION  
The thread picker can only be moved  
within a certain range. Do not pull it with  
extreme force.  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installing the bobbin  
Installing the bobbin case  
Insert the bobbin into the bobbin case.  
Insert the bobbin case into the hook.  
1
1
Insert the bobbin case while aligning the tab  
on the bobbin case with the notch in the hook,  
as shown in the illustration.  
1
2
2
Note  
Check that the thread winds off the bobbin  
clockwise as shown in the illustration. If the  
bobbin is installed with the thread winding  
off in the opposite direction, the embroidery  
will not be sewn correctly.  
1 Tab  
2 Notch  
1
2
• Fully insert the bobbin case until it snaps  
into place.  
Pass the thread through the thread slit and  
under the tension-adjusting spring.  
2
3
1
4
2
5
6
Close the hook cover.  
2
7
1 Thread slit  
2 Tension-adjusting spring  
8
Pull the thread through the opening in the  
tension-adjusting spring.  
9
3
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
Memo  
1
This embroidery machine is not equipped  
with a bobbin-winder. Use pre-wound (L  
type) bobbins.  
The optional bobbin winder (stand-alone  
type) and optional metal bobbins can also  
be used. (Refer to page 5, 188.)  
1 Pull out about 50 mm (2 inches) of thread.  
Installing the Bobbin 19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EMBROIDERING TUTORIAL ——————————————————————————————————————————————  
2. Turning ON the Machine  
Connect the power supply cord, and then turn on the embroidery machine. For precautions concerning the  
power supply, refer to page 14.  
Plug the power supply cord into the machine.  
When the screen shown below appears after  
the initial screen, touch  
1
4
.
Insert the plug of the power supply cord into a  
household electrical outlet.  
X The pattern type selection screen appears,  
2
and the start/stop button lights up in red.  
The carriage moves to its initial position.  
• If the number 1 needle bar is not already at  
the embroidering position, the needle bar  
case moves and the number 1 needle bar  
moves to the embroidering position.  
5
CAUTION  
Make sure to keep your hands and other  
items away from the carriage, in order to  
prevent any injuries.  
Note  
(For U.S.A. only)  
Switch on the main power switch on the back  
of the machine to “I”.  
3
This appliance has a polarized plug (one  
blade wider than the other). To reduce the  
risk of electrical shock, this plug is intended  
to fit into a polarized outlet in only one  
direction. If the plug does not fit fully in the  
outlet, reverse the plug. If it still does not fit,  
contact a qualified electrician to install the  
proper outlet. Do not modify the plug in any  
way.  
Memo  
X The buzzer beeps once and the LCD screen  
If the machine is turned off in the middle of  
embroidering, the machine will  
comes on.  
automatically save the design position  
when turned on again. At that time, you will  
be asked if you wish to continue  
embroidering or begin a new operation.  
(Refer to “Resume Embroidering After  
Turning OFF the Machine” on page 83.)  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding the screens  
When the machine is turned on and  
is touched, the pattern type selection screen appears. The  
operations described below will be entered using the operation panel. For precautions concerning the use of the  
touch panel, refer to page 16.  
The screen that appears the next time that the embroidery machine is turned on differs depending on how the  
machine was previously turned off. (Refer to page 62.)  
2
1
2
Reference  
No. Display  
Key Name  
Function  
3
Page  
1
Settings key  
Machine  
Touch this key to change the embroidery machine settings.  
p. 140  
4
5
2
3
4
operations guide Touch this key to check a machine operation.  
key  
p.151  
6
New embroidery Cancels all operations previously performed and returns to  
key  
the initial pattern group selection screen.  
7
When a problem occurs, for example, there is an operating  
procedure that you do not know, touch this key to view  
solutions.  
Help key  
p. 153  
p. 143  
8
This area displays the selected pattern. The line 6 shows the  
embroidering area for the extra-large embroidery frame. The  
embroidery frame indications, the grid lines and other  
display settings can be specified from the machine settings  
screen.  
Pattern display  
area  
9
5
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
*The keys in the table above appear and can be used in most of the screens described later in this manual. The  
settings key cannot be used in the embroidering settings screen.  
Turning ON the Machine 21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EMBROIDERING TUTORIAL ——————————————————————————————————————————————  
Screen overview  
The basic operation flow is shown below.  
In the pattern type selection screen, select  
a pattern type. (Refer to page 23, 50)  
1 Touch this key to continue to the pattern  
editing screen. This key is not available  
unless a pattern type is selected.  
In the pattern list screen, select the  
pattern. (Refer to page 23, 51)  
1 Touch this key to return to the pattern type  
selection screen.  
2 Touch this key to continue to the pattern  
editing screen.  
In the pattern editing screen, edit the  
pattern. (Refer to page 25, 52)  
1 Touch this key to return to the pattern type  
selection screen and add another pattern.  
2 Touch this key to continue to the  
embroidering settings screen.  
In the embroidering settings screen, if it is a  
combined pattern , edit the entire pattern, specify the  
embroidering settings and check the embroidery area.  
(Refer to page 26, 54  
)
1 Touch this key to quit the current operation  
and return to the pattern type selection  
screen.  
2
Touch this key to return to the pattern editing  
screen  
Touch this key to continue to the embroidering  
screen  
.
3
.
In the embroidering screen, check the thread  
colors assigned to the needle bars, and then install  
the upper threads.Touch the unlock key  
so  
that the start/stop button starts flashing in green and  
the embroidery machine is ready to begin sewing.  
After the embroidery is sewn, the embroidering  
settings screen appears. (Refer to page 33, 56)  
1 Touch this key to return to the embroidering  
settings screen.  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Selecting an Embroidery Pattern  
As an example, we will select the pattern shown at the right, on the last page of  
the embroidery patterns.  
In the pattern type selection screen, select a pattern category (type).  
Pattern type selection screen (For details on the keys and other information on the screen, refer to page 50.)  
2
1
2
1 Pattern type keys  
In the pattern list screen, search for the desired pattern, and then touch the key for the pattern.  
Pattern list screen (For details on the keys and other information on the screen, refer to page 51.)  
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 Pattern keys  
2 Displays a preview image.  
9
Checking a preview image from the pattern selection screen  
Touch  
to preview the image prior to selecting.  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
Touch  
to return to the pattern selection screen.  
Selecting an Embroidery Pattern 23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EMBROIDERING TUTORIAL ——————————————————————————————————————————————  
Touch the desired pattern.  
3
Selecting an embroidery pattern  
For this example, touch  
.
We will select a floral on the second page.  
Touch  
to select the embroidery  
1
patterns category.  
X The selected pattern appears in the pattern  
display area.  
X The list of embroidery patterns appears.  
Touch  
and  
until the desired  
2
page is displayed.  
• After a pattern is selected, the following  
appear:  
For this example, display the last page.  
1 Vertical length of the pattern  
2 Horizontal width of the pattern  
3 Number of thread color changes  
and the keys indicated by 4, which can be  
used to change the pattern size or mirror  
image the pattern. The functions that can be  
used differ depending on the type of pattern  
that is selected. (Refer to “Changing the size  
of the pattern” on page 103.)  
• If the wrong pattern was selected or you  
wish to select a different pattern, touch the  
desired pattern.  
• To select a pattern group other than the  
embroidery patterns, touch  
1 Cancel key  
The pattern type selection screen appears.  
• When there is more than one page, the  
following appear:  
Touch  
to display the selected design in  
4
5
preview enlarged image.  
Touch  
to display the next screen.  
2 Current page number  
3 Total number of pages  
4 Next page key  
Touch this key to display the next page. If  
the next page key is touched while the last  
page is displayed, the first page is displayed.  
5 Previous page key  
Touch this key to display the previous page.  
If the previous page key is touched while the  
first page is displayed, the last page is  
displayed.  
This confirms the pattern selection.  
X The pattern editing screen appears.  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Editing the Embroidery Pattern  
When  
in the pattern list screen is touched, the pattern editing screen appears. From this screen, the  
pattern can be edited.  
Pattern editing screen (For details on the keys and other information on the screen, refer to page 52.)  
2
1
2
1 Highlights the sizes of embroidery frames that  
can be used to sew the currently selected  
embroidery pattern  
2 Shows the size of the currently selected  
embroidery pattern  
4 Touch this key to delete the pattern, for example,  
if the wrong pattern was selected. No pattern is  
selected and the pattern type selection screen  
appears.  
5 Continues to the next screen  
6 Displays a preview image  
The top value shows the height and the bottom  
value shows the width.  
3
7 Touch to edit the pattern.  
3 Shows the number of thread color changes for the  
currently selected embroidery pattern  
4
5
In this example, we will not edit the pattern. Without performing any editing operations, continue to the next  
screen.  
6
Memo  
7
Continuing to the embroidering  
settings screen  
If an operation in the pattern editing screen  
is interrupted and the machine is turned off,  
the operation can be continued after the  
8
machine is turned on again. When the  
machine is turned on again, you will be  
asked if you wish to continue the previous  
operation or begin a new one. (Refer to  
“Resume the Operation Being Performed  
Before the Machine Was Turned OFF” on  
page 62.)  
Press  
.
1
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
X The embroidering settings screen is  
displayed.  
Editing the Embroidery Pattern 25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EMBROIDERING TUTORIAL ——————————————————————————————————————————————  
5. Specifying Embroidering Setting  
When  
in the pattern editing screen is touched, the embroidering settings screen appears. From this  
screen, the entire pattern can be edited and embroidering settings can be specified. In addition, the  
embroidering position can be checked and a pattern can be saved for later use.  
Embroidering settings screen (For details on the keys and other information on the screen, refer to page 54.)  
1 Restarts from the beginning  
2 Returns to the pattern editing screen  
3 Displays a preview image  
4 Touch to check the embroidering area.  
5 Continues to the next screen  
6 Touch to edit the pattern.  
7 Touch these keys to specify how the pattern will  
be embroidered.  
8 Touch to store the pattern.  
9 In the embroidering settings screen, the  
embroidery frame guide in the pattern display  
area indicates the size of the installed embroidery  
frame.  
In this example, we will not specify any of the embroidering settings. Continue with the next operation.  
Memo  
Memo  
If the embroidery frame is not positioned  
correctly when continuing to the  
embroidering settings screen, the  
embroidery frame is moved to the correct  
position at the same time that the  
embroidering settings screen is displayed.  
(Refer to “Embroidery Frame Position and  
Movement” on page 70.)  
If an operation in the embroidering settings  
screen is interrupted and the machine is  
turned off, the operation can be continued  
after the machine is turned on again. When  
the machine is turned on again, you will be  
asked if you wish to continue the previous  
operation or begin a new one. (Refer to  
“Resume the Operation Being Performed  
Before the Machine Was Turned OFF” on  
page 62.)  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6. Previewing the Image  
You can view an image of the completed pattern within the embroidery frame.  
Memo  
Checking a preview image  
The preview image can also be displayed  
from the pattern editing screen.  
Display the preview image to check that the  
embroidery will be sewn as desired.  
Touch  
.
2
1
1
2
X The preview image is displayed.  
3
4
5
6
1 Touch these keys to display the pattern in the  
various sizes of embroidery frames. The  
embroidery frames that appear in white on gray  
keys can be selected.  
2 Touch this key to display an enlarged view of the  
pattern.  
7
8
Touch  
screen.  
to return to the previous  
2
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
Previewing the Image 27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EMBROIDERING TUTORIAL ——————————————————————————————————————————————  
7. Hooping the Fabric in the Embroidery Frame  
After selecting the pattern to be embroidered, check which embroidery frames can be used to sew the pattern.  
Select the appropriate frame, and hoop the fabric and stabilizer in the embroidery frame.  
(Refer to “Attaching Iron-On Stabilizer (Backing) to Fabric” on page 66.) For precautions concerning the fabric,  
refer to page 16.  
Embroidery frame types  
There are four sizes of embroidery frames. For  
details on the uses for each frame, refer to  
“Correctly Using the Embroidery Frames” on  
page 65.  
Note  
If the fabric is not taut, the pattern may be  
misaligned or the fabric may pucker. Follow  
the procedure described below to firmly  
stretch the fabric in the embroidery frame so  
Icon  
Name  
Embroidering area  
that the fabric is not loose. In addition, be  
sure to work on a level surface when putting  
the fabric in the embroidery frame.  
Extra-large  
embroidery  
frame  
200 mm (H)  
×
300 mm (W)  
(7-7/8 inches (H)  
×
11-3/4 inches (W))  
Large  
embroidery  
frame  
130 mm (H)  
×
180 mm (W)  
Hooping the fabric in the  
embroidery frame  
(
5-1/8 inches ( H)  
×
7-1/8 inches (W))  
Medium  
embroidery  
frame  
100 mm (H)  
×
×
100 mm (W)  
Select an embroidery frame.  
(4  
inches (H)  
4
inches (W))  
1
From the sizes of embroidery frames indicated  
in the screen, select the embroidery frame that  
you wish to use.  
Small  
embroidery  
frame  
40 mm (H) × 60 mm (W)  
(1-1/2 inches (H) 2-3/8 inches (W))  
×
CAUTION  
If embroidery frames other than the four  
included frames are used the embroidery  
frame may hit the presser foot and  
damage the machine, or cause injury to  
the user.  
Embroidery frames that can be used appear  
darker (  
) embroidery frames that cannot  
).  
Note  
be used appear lighter (  
The embroidery frame indicators show all  
embroidery frame sizes in which the  
embroidery pattern can be sewn. Be sure to  
use an embroidery frame of the most  
suitable size. If the embroidery frame that is  
too large is used, the pattern may be  
misaligned or the fabric may pucker. (Refer  
to “Correctly Using the Embroidery Frames”  
on page 65.)  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hooping fabric in the small embroidery frame  
The procedure for hooping fabric in the small  
embroidery frame is described below.  
Securely tighten the screw, and then check  
that the fabric is taut.  
6
The same procedure is used to hoop the fabric in  
the medium embroidery frame.  
For details on hooping fabric in the large  
embroidery frame and the extra-large embroidery  
frame, refer to “Hooping the Fabric” on page 67.  
Loosen the screw on the outer frame.  
2
• After stretching the fabric, lightly tapping it  
should produce a drum-like sound.  
• Firmly clamp together the inner and outer  
frames so that the bottom of the inner frame  
is lower than the bottom of the outer frame.  
2
1
1
2
1 Screw  
Place the fabric with the right side up on top  
of the outer frame.  
3
3
1
2
1 Inner frame  
2 Outer frame  
3 Bottom of inner frame  
3
• Using the included disc-shaped screwdriver,  
firmly tighten the screw.  
4
• The outer frame does not have a front or back  
side. Either side can be used as the front.  
5
Press the inner frame into the outer frame.  
6
4
1
7
1 Disc-shaped screwdriver  
8
The amount that the fabric is stretched and the use of  
stabilizer material differ depending on the type of  
fabric being embroidered. Try various methods to  
achieve the best embroidering results. (Refer to  
“Hooping Techniques” on page 166.)  
9
• Be sure that there are no wrinkles in the fabric  
after it is stretched in the embroidery frame.  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
Lightly tighten the screw, and then pull the  
edges of the fabric.  
5
Memo  
This embroidery machine can also be used  
with the optional cap frames. (Refer to  
“Using the Optional Cap Frame” on  
page 169.)  
Hooping the Fabric in the Embroidery Frame 29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EMBROIDERING TUTORIAL ——————————————————————————————————————————————  
8. Attaching the Embroidery Frame to the Machine  
After hooping the fabric in the embroidery frame, attach the frame to the embroidery machine.  
CAUTION  
If the embroidery frame is not correctly attached it may hit the presser foot and damage the  
machine, or cause injury to the user.  
When attaching the embroidery frame, make sure that the start/stop button is lit in red. If the  
start/stop button is flashing in green, the embroidery machine may start sewing. If the  
embroidery machine accidentally starts operating, injuries may result.  
When attaching the embroidery frame, make sure that the embroidery frame does not hit any  
other part of the embroidery machine.  
Note  
Before attaching the embroidery frame, check that there is enough thread in the bobbin.  
Attaching the embroidery frame  
Adjust the width of the embroidery frame holder to the size of the embroidery frame, and then attach the  
embroidery frame to the machine. As an example, the procedure for attaching the small embroidery frame is  
described below.  
Embroidery frame  
Holes  
Left arm of embroidery frame holder  
Move the arm of the embroidery frame holder to the left or  
right to adjust it to the size of the embroidery frame.  
Positioning slots  
Clip on embroidery frame holder.  
Insert the embroidery frame into the clips  
on the embroidery frame holder.  
Positioning Pin  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Loosen the two thumb screws on the  
embroidery frame holder.  
1
Note  
If the screw is too tight, please use the included  
disc-shaped screwdriver.  
Please firmly tighten the two thumb screws  
with included disc-shaped screwdriver. The  
machine will recognize the wrong frame size,  
if the two screws are not tightened.  
2
X The embroidery frame holder is ready for  
the embroidery frame to be attached.  
1
Hold the embroidery frame level, and then  
simultaneously align both the left and right  
mounts with the embroidery frame holder clips.  
3
2
1 Left arm  
2 Thumb screws  
X The left arm of the embroidery frame holder  
can be moved.  
• Only loosen the thumb screws a maximum  
of 2 turns counter clockwise. Do not remove  
the screw.  
1
2
Move the left arm to align the screw on the  
right side with the mark for the embroidery  
frame to be installed, and then tighten the  
thumb screws.  
2
For this example, align with mark 5.  
• The inner frame should be on top.  
3
Note  
4
Incorrect frame positioning.  
5
3
4
2
1
5
6
6
7
8
Insert the embroidery frame until it snaps into  
place.  
1 Mark for extra-large embroidery frame  
2 Mark for large embroidery frame  
4
9
3 Mark for medium embroidery frame  
4 Mark for embroidery frame for industrial  
embroidery machines (When using embroidery  
frames for industrial embroidery machines, THE  
MACHINE DOES NOT RECOGNIZE THE  
SEWING AREA OF THE FRAME. Be sure to use  
the trial sewing function to check that the pattern  
fits within the sewing area. If an embroidery  
frame for an industrial embroidery machine is  
installed, the right arm of the embroidery frame  
holder must also move. For details, refer to  
page 168.)  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
1
5 Mark for small embroidery frame  
6 Align the screw with the mark.  
1 Make sure that the pins on the left and right arms  
of the embroidery frame holder fit into the  
positioning slot and hole on the embroidery frame.  
Attaching the Embroidery Frame to the Machine 31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EMBROIDERING TUTORIAL ——————————————————————————————————————————————  
9. Checking the Embroidery Area  
Check the embroidery area to make sure that the embroidery will be sewn in the desired location and will not  
be misaligned and that the embroidery frame will not hit the presser foot.  
If the embroidery frame is not correctly positioned, it moves to the correct position, and then the embroidering  
position is indicated.  
Touch  
.
When the embroidery frame moves to the  
desired position, touch again.  
1
3
X The embroidery frame stops moving, and  
the next screen appears.  
X The presser foot is lowered and the  
embroidery frame moves to show the  
embroidery area.  
The corners of the octagon showing the  
embroidery area for the pattern are indicated  
by changing direction.  
1 Touch to continue moving the frame.  
2 Touch to stop checking the embroidering area.  
2
To continue moving the embroidery frame,  
4
touch  
. To stop checking the  
embroidering area, touch  
.
Continuing to the embroidering  
screen  
After finishing the necessary operations in the  
embroidering settings screen, continue to the  
embroidering screen.  
Carefully watch the movement of the  
embroidery frame and check that the  
embroidery is sewn in the desired location and  
that the embroidery frame does not hit the  
presser foot.  
Touch  
.
1
Stop checking the embroidery frame area.  
The embroidery frame can be temporarily  
stopped at a desired position or the checking of  
the embroidering area can be stopped.  
X The embroidering screen appears.  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10. Upper Threading  
Check the embroidering screen for information on which needle bars should be threaded with which thread  
colors, and then thread the upper threads.  
Checking the needle bars and thread colors  
In the embroidering settings screen, touch  
to display the embroidering screen and the message  
2
instructing that the needle bars be threaded (that the thread spools from the previous time be changed). Check  
the thread colors in this screen.  
Embroidering screen (For details on the keys and other information on the screen, refer to page 56.)  
Threadcolor  
name  
Thread  
color  
Needle bar  
number  
or number  
1
2
3
1 Thread information for the first needle bar  
2 Thread information for the second needle bar  
3 Thread information for the third needle bar  
4 Thread information for the fourth needle bar  
5 Thread information for the fifth needle bar  
6 Thread information for the sixth needle bar  
7 If no thread color name is displayed, that needle  
bar has not been used.  
Thread with the color name that appears beside each  
needle bar number is threaded on that needle bar.  
For the screen shown  
1: Lime green  
2: Moss green  
3: Orange  
4: Red  
5: Yellow  
4
5
6
If a thread color had been assigned to the needle  
bar on a previously sewn design, the needle bar  
will show the previously assigned color.  
If there is no name beside the needle bar number,  
that needle bar is not used. For this example, needle  
bar 6 is not used.  
7
8 Change thread spools message (Refer to page 77.)  
This message appears when it is necessary for the  
8
thread spools to be changed. If  
9 is not  
touched to close the message, embroidering  
cannot continue.  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
Upper Threading 33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EMBROIDERING TUTORIAL ——————————————————————————————————————————————  
Touch  
.
1
X The screen indicating that the spools be changed is closed.  
• In addition to checking the thread colors, information such as the number of stitches and the sewing  
time can be checked and various embroidering settings can be specified in the embroidering screen.  
1 Shows the embroidering order for the thread  
colors.  
2 Indicates the needle bar number where the thread  
color at the left is assigned.  
4 Touch a key to move the selected needle bar to  
the sewing position. Use when threading the  
needle with the automatic needle-threading  
mechanism.  
3 Shows the number of thread color changes, the  
number of stitches, the embroidering time and  
the length of time until the spools will need to be  
changed.  
5 Use these keys to specify various embroidering  
settings or to return to the embroidering settings  
screen.  
6 To start the machine, touch this key to unlock the  
machine, and then press the start/stop button.  
CAUTION  
When  
(unlock key) in the embroidering screen is touched, the start/stop button begins  
flashing in green and the embroidery machine can start sewing. If the upper threading is being  
performed or the needle is being threaded, be careful that the embroidery machine is not  
accidentally started, otherwise injuries may result.  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upper threading  
Use embroidery thread to thread the needle bars in order, starting with needle bar 1.  
Press  
in order to view a video of the operation  
(To page 3)  
on the LCD (see page 151).  
CAUTION  
When threading the upper thread, carefully follow the instructions. If the upper threading is  
not performing correctly, the thread may break or become tangled, causing the needle to  
bend or break.  
2
Memo  
Note  
The path that the embroidery machine  
should be threaded is indicated by a line on  
the machine. Be sure to thread the machine  
as indicated.  
It is recommended that rayon or polyester  
embroidery thread be used (120 den/2, 135  
dtex/2, 40 weight (in Americas and Europe),  
#50 (in Japan)).  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
Upper Threading 35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EMBROIDERING TUTORIAL ——————————————————————————————————————————————  
The numbers indicate the thread path for each of the numbered needle bars. Be very careful to  
correctly thread the needle bars.  
3
4
2
5
1
6
6
1
5
2
4
3
1
6
6 5  
2 1  
2
5
6
1
5
2
4
3
4
3
Place on spool pin 1 the spool of thread with  
the color (lime green) specified for needle bar  
1.  
Pass the thread through the number 1 hole in  
the thread guide just above the spool, and  
then pass the thread through the number 1  
hole in the thread guide toward the front of  
the machine.  
1
2
2
1
• Make sure that the spool stand is opened in  
the shape of a V.  
• When using small spools of thread, be sure  
to place the enclosed spool mat on the spool  
pin before placing the spool on the pin.  
• Use spool cap on all spools of thread shorter  
than the height of the spool pin.  
1 Number 1 hole in the thread guide above the  
spool  
2 Number 1 hole in the thread guide toward the  
front of the machine  
1 Spool mat  
2 Small spool  
3 Spool cap  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 5 4 3 2 1  
1
6
2
5
3
4
1
6 5 4 3 2  
2
3
6 5  
2 1  
4
Pass the thread through the hole in the  
number 1 upper thread guide.  
Pass the thread toward you from the inside of  
the thread guide.  
Wind the thread clockwise once around the  
number 1 thread tension disc.  
3
5
1
2
1
3
4
5
6
1 Hole in upper thread guide  
1 Thread tension disc  
• Make sure that the thread is securely caught  
in the thread tension disc and passed correct  
thread guide pins. (See left illustration at top  
of page.)  
Pass the thread through the number 1 upper  
thread guide.  
Hold the thread with both hands, and then  
7
4
8
pass it under the guide from the right.  
9
Note  
All thread tension disks are threaded in  
clockwise direction.  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
1
Pass around here.  
1 Upper thread guide  
Upper Threading 37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EMBROIDERING TUTORIAL ——————————————————————————————————————————————  
Pass the thread along the thread path  
indicated on the machine, and then pass it  
under the number 1 middle thread guide  
plate.  
Pass the thread down through the slot to the  
lower thread guide, and then through the hole  
in the number 1 lower thread guide.  
6
8
2
1
1 Middle thread guide  
2 Thread guide pin  
• The path from the upper thread guide  
around the thread tension disc and to the  
1
middle thread guide (steps  
5
through  
6
)
differ depending on the spool number.  
Passing the thread from the left to the right  
through the thread guide pins is designed to  
prevent the thread from becoming tangled.  
Thread each needle bar as shown in the  
illustration.  
1 Hole in lower thread guide  
Use the included threader to pass the thread  
into the number 1 needle bar thread guide.  
9
Pass the thread along the number 1 slot to  
pass it through the number 1 take-up lever  
hole from right to left.  
7
1
1 Needle bar thread guide  
2 Needle changing tool (Threader)  
1 Thread take-up lever  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Threading the needle  
Note  
To avoid damage, the automatic needle-  
threading mechanism may return to the  
back position when you turn the  
Use the automatic needle-threading mechanism to  
thread the needle.  
handwheel.  
Press  
The automatic needle-threading mechanism  
can thread one needle at the sewing  
position. When this mechanism is used, be  
sure that the needle bar that you want to  
thread is positioned as the sewing position,  
otherwise the automatic needle-threading  
mechanism cannot be used at the particular  
needle. If the needle bar is not at the sewing  
position, move it there. (Refer to page 40.)  
(to page 2) →  
in order to view a video  
of the operation on the LCD (see page 151).  
2
Press the automatic needle-threading button.  
1
Pull out about 15 cm (6 inches) of thread.  
Allow thread to relax and eliminate any stress  
on the thread. Then, as shown in the  
illustration, pass the thread under the fork of  
the automatic needle-threading mechanism  
from the right, and then catch the thread with  
the hook that passes through the eye of the  
needle.  
2
1
2
X The hook on the automatic needle-  
threading mechanism passes through the  
eye of the needle.  
2
3
CAUTION  
4
If the needle is not fully inserted, the  
hook of the automatic needle-threading  
mechanism will not pass through the eye  
of the needle during automatic needle  
threading, and the hook may bend or the  
needle cannot be threaded.  
If the hook of the automatic needle-  
threading mechanism is bent or  
damaged, contact your authorized  
retailer.  
While the hook of the automatic needle-  
threading mechanism is passed through  
the eye of the needle, do not rotate the  
handwheel, otherwise the automatic  
needle-threading mechanism may be  
damaged.  
5
1
6
1 Hook  
2 Fork  
7
Note  
8
When catching the thread with the hook, be  
careful that the thread does not become  
loose.  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
Upper Threading 39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EMBROIDERING TUTORIAL ——————————————————————————————————————————————  
Pass the thread under the guide on the presser  
foot.  
Press the automatic needle-threading button.  
3
5
1
2
• The threader moves back away from the  
needle. The thread is pulled through the  
needle eye.  
1 Guide on presser foot  
2 Notch in guide on presser foot  
• Make sure that the thread securely passes  
• The wiper comes out and catches the thread  
between the needle and the threader.  
• The threader goes back to the original home  
position.  
through the notch in the guide on the presser  
foot.  
Securely pass the thread through the groove  
in the thread cutter, and then lightly pull the  
thread to cut it.  
4
This completes the upper threading for needle  
bar 1.  
1
Thread the remaining needle bars in the same  
way. However, if the needle bar to be threaded  
is not moved to the embroidery position, the  
needle cannot be threaded with the automatic  
needle-threading mechanism. For the  
remaining needle bars, perform the following  
operation to move the needle bar to the  
embroidery position before trying to thread the  
needle.  
1 Groove in thread cutter  
Moving the needle bar to be threaded to the  
sewing position  
Note  
Touch the key for the needle bar that you wish  
to thread.  
If the thread is not correctly passed through  
the groove in the thread cutter, the message  
“Wiper error.” appears and the needle  
cannot be threaded. Be sure to securely pass  
the thread through the groove.  
1
If enough thread is not pulled out, the  
thread cannot be pulled through the thread  
cutter.  
X The selected needle bar moves to the  
embroidery position.  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Note  
If the thread is not taut, it may come out of  
the thread tension disc. After upper  
threading is finished, check again to make  
sure that the thread is correctly passed into  
the thread tension disc. (Refer to step  
page 37.)  
5
on  
Memo  
2
When changing one of the upper thread  
colors, it is easy to re-thread by cutting the  
thread currently being used between the  
spool and the thread guide above the spool.  
Place the new spool on the spool pin and  
tie the end of the new thread to the end of  
the previous thread. Then pull the thread  
through to the needle. (Refer to page 78.)  
1
2
Using the spool net  
When using metallic thread or any other strong  
thread, place the included spool net over the  
spool before sewing.  
If the spool net is too long, fold it once to match  
the size of the spool before placing it over the  
spool.  
3
It may be necessary to adjust thread tension when  
using the spool net.  
4
5
1
6
7
2
8
1 Spool net  
2 Thread  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
Upper Threading 41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EMBROIDERING TUTORIAL ——————————————————————————————————————————————  
11. Sewing the Embroidery  
Now, the embroidery machine is ready to begin sewing.  
When the machine starts sewing, the presser foot is automatically lowered, the necessary thread trimming  
operations at the end of stitching are performed, the threads are changed as necessary while the embroidery is  
sewn, and the machine stops when the end of the stitching is reached.  
CAUTION  
For safety reasons, the embroidery machine must not be left unattended while it is sewing.  
While the machine is in operation, pay special attention to the needle location. In addition,  
keep your hands away from all moving parts such as the needle, needle bar case, thread take-  
up lever and carriage, otherwise injuries may result.  
Locking mechanism  
For safety reasons, this embroidery machine is equipped with a locking function.  
Normally, the embroidery machine is locked (it cannot start sewing). Unless the machine is unlocked, it  
cannot start sewing. If the embroidery machine is not started within 10 seconds after unlocking it, it  
automatically returns to being locked.  
The start/stop button shows whether or not the embroidery machine is locked. If the start/stop button lights up  
in red, the machine is locked. If the start/stop button flashes in green, the machine is unlocked.  
Press the start/stop button.  
Press the start/stop button while it is flashing in  
2
Starting embroidering  
green. If the start/stop button returns to being lit  
in red, perform this procedure again from step  
1
.
Note  
Make sure that there are no objects within  
the moving area of the embroidery frame. If  
the embroidery frame hits another object,  
the pattern may become misaligned.  
Touch  
to unlock the embroidery  
1
machine.  
X The start/stop button lights up in green and  
begins sewing the first color.  
Note  
The light goes off when sewing starts.  
X The start/stop button begins flashing in  
green and the embroidery machine can be  
started.  
• If the start/stop button is not pressed within  
10 seconds after unlocking the embroidery  
machine, the machine becomes locked  
again.  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
X The following screen appears.  
Continuing embroidering  
To sew the same pattern again, touch  
.
1 A red frame around the thread information box  
indicates which needle bar is currently being  
used for sewing.  
X The embroidering screen appears so the  
same pattern can be sewn again.  
2
• While the embroidery machine is sewing,  
To select a new pattern, touch  
or  
.
the point being sewn is indicated by the  
green crosshairs in the pattern display area.  
In addition, the number of stitches and the  
time count up.  
After sewing of the first color is finished, the  
machine automatically stops and trims the  
thread. The needle bar case moves to the 2nd  
color position and sewing of the second color  
begins.  
3
X The pattern type selection screen appears.  
1
2
Note  
Automatic Lock stitching can be set so that  
it is sewn at the beginning of the  
embroidery, when starting to sew after  
change thread colors, and when trimming  
the thread. (Refer to “Automatic Lock Stitch  
Setting” on page 88.)  
The sewing speed can be changed, even  
while the pattern is being sewn. (Refer to  
“Maximum Sewing Speed Setting” on  
page 91.)  
3
4
5
6
7
8
X The thread color display in the screen  
continues to the second color, and the  
thread information for the second needle  
bar is surrounded by the red frame.  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
This continues until the last color is sewn, and  
the embroidery machine automatically stops.  
4
X The embroidering settings screen reappears.  
X The start/stop button lights up in red.  
• No thread trimming operations at the  
beginning of stitching and at the end of  
stitching are necessary.  
Sewing the Embroidery 43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EMBROIDERING TUTORIAL ——————————————————————————————————————————————  
Press the thread trimming button.  
2
Stopping embroidering  
The machine can be stopped during sewing.  
Temporarily pausing  
Press the start/stop button.  
1
X The bobbin and upper threads are trimmed.  
• Before turning off the embroidery machine,  
be sure to trim the threads.  
Set the main power switch to “{”.  
3
X The machine stops and the start/stop button  
lights up in red.  
• The thread is not trimmed.  
• To continue sewing, after checking that the  
upper thread is taut, touch the unlock key,  
and then press the start/stop button.  
Memo  
X The embroidery machine is turned off and  
the display and the start/stop button  
indicator go off.  
• Sewing can resume after the embroidery  
machine is turned on again. Back up several  
stitches to overlap the stitching. For details,  
refer to “Resume Embroidering After Turning  
OFF the Machine” on page 83.  
If the Reserve Stop key is touched while  
embroidery is being sewn, the machine  
stops before sewing for the next color  
begins. (Refer to “Stopping the machine at  
the next color change” on page 92.)  
Before starting to sew, the machine can be  
set to stop at any thread color change.  
(Refer to “Specifying pause locations before  
embroidering” on page 92.)  
Memo  
The machine can be stopped at any time,  
even while it is embroidering; however, if  
the machine is stopped when the thread  
color is changed, it is not necessary to go  
back through the stitching when  
embroidering is continued. The machine  
can be set to stop when the thread color is  
changed. (For details, refer to “Specifying  
pause locations before embroidering” on  
page 92.)  
Resume sewing after the machine was turned off  
Press the start/stop button.  
1
If the thread breaks while sewing  
If a problem occurs while sewing, such as if the  
thread breaks, the machine stops automatically.  
Re-thread the broken thread, back up several  
stitches, and then continue sewing. For details,  
refer to “If the Thread Breaks or the Bobbin  
Thread Runs Out While Embroidering” on  
page 79.  
X The embroidery machine stops and the  
start/stop button lights up in red.  
• The thread is not trimmed.  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12. Checking the Thread Tension  
Check the embroidery to see if it was sewn with the correct thread tension. If the thread tension is not adjusted  
correctly, the stitching may be uneven or there may be puckering in the fabric.  
Correct thread tension  
From the wrong side of the fabric, the bobbin  
thread should be about one third of the stitch  
width.  
(Right side)  
(Wrong side)  
(Right side)  
(Wrong side)  
2
The tension of the upper thread is too loose,  
resulting in a loose upper thread, loose thread  
locks or loops appearing on the right side of the  
fabric.  
If the embroidery appears as shown below, the  
thread tension is incorrect. Correct the thread  
tension.  
1
2
(Right side)  
(Wrong side)  
Tighten the tension dial by turning the dial  
clockwise.  
3
The tension of the upper thread is too tight,  
resulting in the lower thread being visible from  
the right side of the fabric.  
For details on adjusting the thread tension, refer to  
“Adjusting the Thread Tension” on page 85.  
4
5
Note  
6
In this tutorial, the thread tension was  
checked after embroidering was finished.  
However, normally, embroidering should  
be temporarily paused and the thread  
tension should be checked after the first 100  
stitches of each color sewn with each  
needle bar.  
7
Loosen the tension dial by turning the dial  
counterclockwise.  
8
The resulting embroidery may not appear as  
expected, due to the type or thickness of the  
fabric being sewn or to the type of stabilizer  
material used. Be sure to sew a trial  
embroidery before sewing on your project.  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
Memo  
In the built-in embroidery patterns, one  
pattern is used for checking the thread  
tension. For details, refer to “Checking the  
thread tension of built-in patterns” on  
page 160.  
Checking the Thread Tension 45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EMBROIDERING TUTORIAL ——————————————————————————————————————————————  
13. Removing the Embroidery Frame and Fabric  
After sewing is finished, remove the embroidery frame, and then remove the fabric from the frame.  
Pull off the embroidery frame toward you.  
2
Removing the embroidery frame  
CAUTION  
When removing the embroidery frame,  
make sure that the start/stop button is lit  
in red. If the start/stop button is flashing  
in green, the machine may start sewing. If  
the machine accidentally starts  
operating, injuries may result.  
When removing the embroidery frame,  
be careful that the embroidery frame  
does not hit any other part of the  
Removing the fabric  
machine.  
Loosen the outer frame screw.  
1
Do not lift up the embroidery frame  
holder with extreme force, otherwise it  
may be damaged.  
With both hands, grab the left and right sides  
of the arms of the embroidery frame holder,  
and then slightly lift up the frame.  
1
The pins on the arms of the embroidery frame  
holder should come out of the holes in the  
sides of embroidery frame.  
X If the screw was tightened using a disc-  
shaped screwdriver, use the included disc-  
shaped screwdriver to loosen it.  
Remove the outer frame, and then remove the  
fabric.  
2
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14. Turning OFF the Machine  
After all embroidery is finished, turn off the machine.  
Set the main power switch to “{”.  
1
Memo  
If the embroidery machine is turned off  
while the pattern type selection screen or  
the pattern list screen is displayed with no  
pattern selected, the pattern type selection  
screen appears when the machine is turned  
on again.  
2
X The embroidery machine is turned off and  
the display and the start/stop button  
indicator goes off.  
Turned OFF  
1
2
Turned ON  
Unplug the power supply cord from the  
2
electrical outlet.  
Grasp the plug when unplugging the power  
supply cord.  
If  
is not touched to con-  
firm the selection of the pattern  
in the pattern list screen, the se-  
lection will be erased if the ma-  
chine is turned off.  
3
If necessary, unplug the power supply cord  
from the machine.  
Store the power supply cord in a safe place.  
3
4
After the opening screen  
5
6
7
8
9
Note  
If a power outage occurs while the  
embroidery machine is being operated, turn  
off the embroidery machine and unplug the  
power supply cord. When restarting the  
embroidery machine, follow the necessary  
procedure to correctly operate the machine.  
(Refer to “Turning ON the Machine” on  
page 20)  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
Turning OFF the Machine 47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EMBROIDERING TUTORIAL ——————————————————————————————————————————————  
If the embroidery machine is turned off  
while the pattern editing screen is  
If the machine is turned off while it is  
sewing, embroidering can continue when  
the machine is turned on again. (Refer to  
“Resume Embroidering After Turning OFF  
the Machine” on page 83.)  
displayed, the way that the pattern appears  
before the machine was turned off is stored  
in the machine's memory. When the  
embroidery machine is turned on again, the  
pattern editing screen as it appeared before  
the machine was turned off can be  
Turned off  
while  
embroidering  
displayed again. (Refer to page 62.)  
Turned ON  
Turned OFF  
Turned ON  
After the opening screen  
After the opening screen  
If the embroidery machine is turned off  
while the embroidery settings screen is  
displayed, the embroidery settings screen  
for the pattern before the machine was  
turned off is stored in the machine's  
memory. When the embroidery machine is  
turned on again, the embroidery settings  
screen as it appeared before the machine  
was turned off can be displayed again.  
(Refer to page 62.)  
Turned off  
either before  
or after  
embroidering  
Turned ON  
After the opening screen  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Screen Quick Reference Guide  
Descriptions of the keys and other information that appear in the screens are provided in the tables below.  
Key displays  
The appearances of the keys have the following meanings.  
(Normal color display)  
(Dark-colored display)  
(Gray display)  
: This key is not selected, but can be selected.  
: This key is selected.  
2
: This key cannot be selected.  
Common screen controls  
The keys described below, except for the settings key, appear in all screens and can always be used. However,  
the settings key cannot be used in the embroidering screen.  
Reference  
No. Display  
Key Name  
Function  
Page  
1
Settings key  
Machine  
Touch this key to change the embroidery machine settings.  
p. 140  
2
operations guide Touch this key to check a machine operation.  
key  
p.151  
New embroidery Cancels all operations previously performed and returns to  
3
4
key  
the initial pattern group selection screen.  
When a problem occurs, for example, there is an operating  
procedure that you do not know, touch this key to view  
solutions.  
Help key  
p. 153  
p. 143  
This area displays the selected pattern. The line 6 shows the  
embroidering area for the extra-large embroidery frame. The  
embroidery frame indications, the grid lines and other  
display settings can be specified from the machine settings  
screen.  
Pattern display  
area  
5
Screen Quick Reference Guide 49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EMBROIDERING TUTORIAL ——————————————————————————————————————————————  
Understanding the pattern type selection screen  
In this screen, select a pattern category (type).  
No.  
Display  
Key Name  
Description  
Reference Page  
Embroidery pattern  
key  
The embroidery pattern for a design can be  
selected.  
1
p. 104  
Frame patterns  
key  
12 stitch types can be combined with 10  
frame shapes, such as a circle and a square.  
2
3
p. 108  
p. 109  
Uppercase letters, lowercase letters,  
numbers, symbols and accented characters  
from 13 fonts can be selected in small,  
medium and large sizes.  
Alphabet key  
Renaissancealphabet Renaissance-style characters designed in a  
4
5
p. 105  
p. 106  
key  
50 mm x 50 mm square.  
Our original alphabet patterns designed with  
flowers decorating large uppercase letters  
(130 mm (H) x 80 mm (W)).  
Floral alphabet  
key  
Appliqué alphabet  
key  
Alphabet appliqué patterns, which are  
6
7
8
9
p. 107  
p. 111  
p. 112  
p. 117  
available in small, medium and large sizes.  
Embroidery patterns  
stored in the machine key memory.  
Recalls patterns stored in the machine’s  
Embroidery cards key  
USB media key  
Recalls patterns from embroidery cards.  
Recalls patterns from USB media.  
By using the included USB cable to connect  
a computer to the embroidery machine,  
patterns can be recalled from the computer.  
0
A
Computer (USB) key  
Edit key  
p. 114  
p. 119  
This key is not available unless a pattern is  
selected. Touch this key to quit trying to add  
another pattern from the pattern type  
selection screen. Return to the pattern  
editing screen.  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding the pattern list screen  
In this screen, select the pattern.  
2
Reference  
Page  
No.  
1
Display  
Key Name  
Size (vertical)  
Size (horizontal)  
Description  
Shows the vertical length of the currently selected  
embroidery pattern.  
Shows the horizontal width of the currently selected  
embroidery pattern.  
2
Number of thread Shows the number of thread color changes for the currently  
3
color changes  
selected embroidery pattern.  
Shows the number of the currently displayed page and the  
total number of pages.  
4
Page  
Touch this key to display the next page. If the next page key  
is touched while the last page is displayed, the first page  
will be displayed.  
5
Next page key  
p. 102  
Touch this key to display the previous page. If the previous  
page key is touched while the first page is displayed, the  
last page will be displayed.  
Previous page  
key  
6
7
8
p. 102  
p. 102  
p. 102  
An image of the pattern appears on the key. Touch the  
image to select the pattern.  
Pattern keys  
Cancel key  
Size key  
Touch to leave the currently selected pattern category and  
choose a different category. Returns to the pattern type  
selection screen.  
Allows the size of the currently selected embroidery pattern  
to be changed.  
9
0
A
B
C
p. 103  
p. 103  
p. 103  
p.27  
Horizontal mirror Allows the currently selected embroidery pattern to be  
image key  
flipped horizontally.  
Vertical mirror  
image key  
Allows the currently selected embroidery pattern to be  
flipped vertically.  
Displays an image of the pattern that is to be embroidered  
so it can be previewed.  
Preview key  
Set key  
Touch after selecting the pattern. The selection of the  
pattern is confirmed and the pattern editing screen appears.  
p. 102  
*Some patterns cannot be edited with 9, 0 or A.  
Screen Quick Reference Guide 51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EMBROIDERING TUTORIAL ——————————————————————————————————————————————  
Understanding the pattern editing screen  
In this screen, the pattern can be edited.  
Reference  
No.  
Display  
Key Name  
Description  
Page  
Shows the sizes of embroidery frames that can be used to  
sew the embroidery pattern currently displayed in the  
pattern display area.  
Embroidery frame  
indicators  
1
p. 28  
Shows the size of the embroidery pattern currently displayed in  
the pattern display area. The top value shows the height and the  
bottom value shows the width. If the embroidery pattern consists  
of multiple patterns that have been combined, the size of the  
entire pattern, including all patterns, is shown.  
2
Pattern size  
Distance from Shows the vertical distance that the pattern being edited is  
center (vertical) moved.  
3
4
5
6
7
8
p.120  
p.120  
Distance from Shows the horizontal distance that the pattern being edited  
center (horizontal) is moved.  
Size (vertical)  
Size (horizontal)  
Rotation angle  
Shows the vertical length of the pattern that is being edited.  
Shows the horizontal width of the pattern that is being  
edited.  
Shows the rotation angle that the pattern being edited is  
rotated.  
p.122  
Number of thread Shows the total number of thread color changes for the  
color changes pattern that is being edited.  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
Reference  
Page  
No.  
Display  
Key Name  
Description  
Selects the pattern that is being edited when the  
embroidery pattern consists of multiple patterns that  
have been combined.  
Pattern selection  
keys  
1
p.120  
Moves the sewing position of the pattern that is being  
edited in the direction of the arrow (If  
is touched,  
2
Positioning keys  
p.120  
the sewing position is moved to the center of the  
embroidering area.)  
Horizontal mirror  
image key  
3
4
5
6
7
8
Flips the pattern being edited horizontally.  
Flips the pattern being edited vertically.  
Changes the size of the pattern that is being edited.  
Rotates the pattern that is being edited.  
p.121  
p.121  
p.121  
p.122  
p.124  
p.123  
Vertical mirror  
image key  
Size key  
Rotate key  
Spacing key  
Array key  
Changes the spacing between the characters in the  
alphabet pattern that is being edited.  
Changes the orientation of the characters in the  
alphabet pattern that is being edited.  
Enables the thread color of each character in an  
9
0
Multi Color key alphabet pattern to be changed; can only be used  
when an alphabet is selected.  
p.126  
p.125  
Changes the density of the pattern that is being  
edited; can only be used if an alphabet or frame  
pattern is selected.  
Density key  
Change thread  
color key  
A
B
C
D
E
Changes the color of the pattern.  
p.127  
p.128  
p.119  
p.27  
Deletes the pattern. If touched, the pattern being  
edited is deleted.  
Delete key  
Merge key  
Adds a pattern. If touched, the pattern group  
selection screen appears.  
Displays an image of the pattern so that it can be  
previewed.  
Preview key  
Edit End key  
Finish editing and continues to the embroidering  
settings screen.  
p.25  
Screen Quick Reference Guide 53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EMBROIDERING TUTORIAL ——————————————————————————————————————————————  
Understanding the embroidering settings screen  
From this screen, the entire pattern can be edited and embroidering settings can be specified. In addition, the  
embroidering position can be checked and a pattern can be saved for later use.  
Reference  
No.  
Display  
Key Name  
Description  
Page  
Shows the sizes of embroidery frames that can be used to  
sew the embroidery pattern currently displayed in the  
pattern display area.  
Embroidery frame  
indicators  
1
p.28  
Shows the size of the embroidery pattern currently displayed in  
the pattern display area. The top value shows the height and the  
bottom value shows the width. If the embroidery pattern consists  
of multiple patterns that have been combined, the size of the  
entire pattern, including all patterns, is shown.  
2
Pattern size  
Distance from Shows the vertical distance that the pattern being edited is  
center (vertical) moved.  
3
4
5
6
7
8
p. 72  
p.72  
Distance from Shows the horizontal distance that the pattern being edited  
center (horizontal) is moved.  
Shows the rotation angle that the pattern being edited is  
Rotation angle  
rotated.  
p.73, 129  
Number of thread Shows the total number of thread color changes for the  
color changes pattern that is being edited.  
Repeat spacing Shows the vertical distance between patterns when repeat  
p.130  
(vertical)  
sewing is selected.  
Repeat spacing Shows the horizontal distance between patterns when  
(horizontal) repeat sewing is selected.  
p. 130  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
Reference  
Page  
No.  
Display  
Key Name  
Rotate All key  
Repeat key  
Description  
Rotates the entire embroidery pattern when it  
consists of multiple patterns that have been  
combined.  
1
p. 73, 129  
2
3
Repeatedly sews the pattern.  
p.130  
Change thread  
color key  
Changes the color of the pattern.  
p.127, 131  
Moves the sewing position of the whole pattern in  
the direction of the arrow (If  
is touched, the  
4
5
Positioning keys  
p.72  
p.88  
sewing position is moved to the center of the  
embroidering area.)  
Specifies that automatic lock stitch is sewn at the  
beginning of the pattern and at the beginning of  
sewing after thread trimming.  
Lock stitching  
(beginning) key  
Lock stitching  
(end) key  
Specifies that automatic lock stitch is sewn when the  
thread is trimmed.  
6
7
8
9
0
A
B
C
D
p.88  
p.91  
p.89  
p.32  
Maximum sewing  
speed key  
Specifies the maximum sewing speed.  
Starting/ending Specifies the needle position at the beginning of  
position key  
sewing and at the end.  
Moves the embroidery frame so that the  
embroidering position can be checked.  
Trial sewing key  
Cancels all operations previously performed and  
returns to the initial pattern type selection screen.  
Quit key  
Edit key  
Touch to return to the pattern editing screen.  
Stores the pattern.  
Store key  
p.136  
p.27  
p.32  
Displays an image of the pattern that is to be  
embroidered so it can be previewed.  
Preview key  
Sewing key  
Finish all operations in the embroidering settings  
screen and continues to the embroidering screen.  
* The functions and operations for the change thread color key 3 and the preview key C are the same in both  
the pattern editing screen and the embroidering settings screen.  
Screen Quick Reference Guide 55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EMBROIDERING TUTORIAL ——————————————————————————————————————————————  
Understanding the embroidering screen  
From this screen, the total number of thread colors and the sewing time can be checked, the needle bar settings  
can be specified, and the stitching forward or backward can be done.  
Reference  
No.  
Display  
Key Name  
Description  
Page  
Shows the part of the pattern that will be sewn with the thread  
color shown first in the thread color sequence display.  
1
Region display  
Thread color Shows the order for the thread color changes. During  
2
3
sequence  
display  
embroidering, this display scrolls so that the color of the  
thread currently being sewn appears at the top.  
Needle bar Indicates the needle bar number where the thread color at  
number  
the left is assigned.  
This indicator shows when the thread spools will need to be  
Spool change changed. The thread spools will need to be changed at the  
4
p. 76  
indicator  
point between the two thread colors where the indicator is  
displayed.  
The bottom value shows the total number of thread color  
5
6
7
8
Sewing order changes in the pattern and the top value shows the thread  
color that is currently being sewn.  
The bottom value shows the total number of stitches in the  
Stitch count pattern and the top value shows how many stitches have  
already been sewn.  
The bottom value shows the total amount of time required to  
Sewing time sew the pattern and the top value shows how much time has  
already passed sewing.  
Time until the  
If the pattern contains seven or more colors, the amount of  
time until the spools change is shown.  
spools must  
p. 75  
p. 34  
be replaced  
Touch a key to move the needle bar position to the selected  
Needle bar needle bar number.  
9
key  
Use when threading the needle with the automatic needle-  
threading mechanism.  
Shows the color and the thread color name (number) for the  
thread on the needle bar indicated on the key. Thread the  
machine as indicated here.  
Thread color  
set up display  
0
A
p.33  
p.91  
Maximum  
sewing speed Specifies the maximum sewing speed.  
key  
*The functions and operations for the maximum sewing speed keys A are the same in both the pattern editing  
screen and the embroidering settings screen.  
Memo  
The thread color numbers in the thread color sequence display and the thread color set up display can  
be changed, for example, to the color name or the thread color number for other brands. (Refer to  
“Changing the thread color information” on page 145.)  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
Reference  
Page  
No.  
Display  
Key Name  
Description  
Reserve Stop While sewing embroidery, touch this key for the machine to  
B
p. 92  
key  
stop as the next color begins.  
Touch this key to quit sewing and return to the  
embroidering settings screen.  
C
D
Cancel key  
Temporary  
needle bar  
settings key  
Enables the needle bar settings to manually be specified  
p. 94  
p.79  
p.42  
Moves the needle forward or backward through the  
stitching. Use this key in the following situations:  
If the thread breaks or runs out while embroidering  
To restart sewing from the beginning  
To continue sewing after the machine was turned off  
Unlocks the machine so it can start sewing within 10  
seconds. When this key is touched, the start/stop button  
flashes in green.  
Forward/  
Backward stitch  
key  
E
F
Unlock key  
Screen Quick Reference Guide 57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EMBROIDERING TUTORIAL ——————————————————————————————————————————————  
When You Have a Question, This May Help You  
Needle at the “embroidering position”  
This is the needle that is placed above the needle  
hole in the needle plate. The needle bar case is  
moved to position that particular needle with the  
next thread color to the “embroidery position”.  
TECHNICAL TERMS:  
USB Type “A” (host) and USB Type “B”  
(function)  
This is one of the communication methods  
Also when using the needle threader, the needle  
between PC (Personal Computer) and peripherals.  
that is going to be threaded should be moved to  
You can connect USB media via USB Type “A”  
the “embroidery position”. (Refer to page 40.)  
(host) port connector and also you can connect  
your machine to your PC via USB Type “B”  
(function) port connector with included USB  
cable. (Refer to page 114.)  
DST  
This is the extension of Tajima data file (*.dst) that  
is one of the data formats of embroidery patterns.  
Tajima data doesn't have any color information,  
so the machine assigns colors automatically when  
you load it. (Refer to page 163.)  
Needle number  
The needles are numbered from right to left. The  
far right needle is number 1 needle. (Refer to  
page viii.)  
1 Needle  
2 Needle hole in the needle plate  
Wiper  
This is the mechanism for pulling the thread. The  
wiper pulls the thread when the needle threader is  
used.  
The wiper also pulls the thread from the material  
when the machine trims the thread. This makes  
trimming threads after embroidering un-  
necessary. (Refer to page 40.)  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Getting false thread breakage error  
-
Check that the position of the upper thread is  
under the upper thread guide plates. (Refer to  
page 36.)  
Check that the position of the upper thread is  
around the thread tension disk. (Refer to  
page 37.)  
PATTERNS:  
Following patterns can be used to embroider by the  
machine.  
-
-
Embroidery data with *.pes, *.phc or *.dst format.  
USB media transfer the data to the machine. Also  
via USB cable, the data can be transferred from  
the PC to the machine.  
-
-
Optional embroidery cards  
Embroidery patterns created by digitizing software  
program  
-
The patterns saved on USB media by the machine  
2
EMBROIDERING:  
Customize the embroidery colors  
-
Use the “Change thread color” function by  
selecting the key on either the “pattern editing”  
or the “embroidery setting” screen. More  
details please see the page 127.  
1 Upper thread guide plates  
2 Thread tension disk  
-
Use the “Temporary needle bar setting”  
function by selecting the key on the  
“embroidering” screen. More details please see  
the page 94.  
Thread tension changed suddenly  
-
-
-
Thread is caught on a rough edge of the spool  
of upper thread.  
Upper thread is caught under the spool of  
thread.  
The thread dust or lint is gathered under the  
bobbin's tension spring.  
Resume an unfinished pattern from the last time  
the machine was switched off.  
-
The machine remembers the pattern and the  
position even after turning off the power. And  
the machine can resume the embroidery when  
the machine turns on again. (Refer to page 62.)  
The frame came out from the carriage  
Make sure that the positioning pins are placed  
into the frame's positioning slot and hole. (Refer  
to page 31.)  
It is a good idea to turn off the machine once to  
originate the carriage before you re-sew the  
pattern.  
Cancel the current design and start again  
Select the “New Embroidery” key on the upper  
left of the screen. The pattern and all information  
will be deleted. (Refer to page 49.)  
When You Have a Question, This May Help You 59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EMBROIDERING TUTORIAL ——————————————————————————————————————————————  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
OTHER BASIC PROCEDURES  
This chapter provides explanations on operations other than those described in  
chapter 2, such as sewing a pattern with seven or more colors, changing the needles  
and changing thread spools.  
Resume the Operation Being Performed Before the Machine Was Turned OFF......62  
Changing the Needle...............................................................................................63  
Replacing the needle / 63  
Correctly Using the Embroidery Frames..................................................................65  
Embroidery frame types and applications / 65  
Attaching Iron-On Stabilizer (Backing) to Fabric ....................................................66  
Hooping the Fabric .................................................................................................67  
Hooping the fabric in the extra-large and large embroidery frames / 67  
Using the embroidery sheet / 68  
Large/small pieces of fabric / 69  
Embroidery Frame Position and Movement.............................................................70  
Changing the Embroidering Position .......................................................................72  
Adjusting the angle / 73  
Embroidering a Pattern Containing Seven or More Colors......................................75  
Checking if thread spool changes are necessary / 75  
Changing the Thread Spools with Designs of Seven or More Colors .......................77  
Change thread spools message / 77  
Easily changing the thread spools / 78  
If the Thread Breaks or the Bobbin Thread Runs Out While Embroidering .............79  
If the upper thread breaks / 79  
If the bobbin thread breaks or runs out / 80  
Embroidering From the Beginning or Middle of the Pattern....................................81  
Resume Embroidering After Turning OFF the Machine ...........................................83  
Adjusting the Thread Tension..................................................................................85  
Adjusting the tension of the bobbin thread / 85  
Adjusting the tension of the upper thread / 86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OTHER BASIC PROCEDURES —————————————————————————————————————————————  
Resume the Operation Being Performed Before the Machine Was Turned OFF  
The screen that appears after the machine is turned on and  
is touched differs depending on how the  
machine was previously turned off. If the machine was turned off while an operation was being performed, you  
can choose to continue the operation being performed before the machine was turned off.  
Turn on the embroidery machine.  
To select a pattern and start a new operation  
Touch  
1
.
3
When the screen shown below appears after  
2
the initial screen, touch  
.
X The pattern type selection screen appears.  
Memo  
• If  
is not touched to confirm the  
selection of the pattern in the pattern list  
screen, the operation cannot be  
continued.  
X A message appears, asking if you wish to  
continue the previous operation or begin a  
new one.  
• The screen that appears when an  
operation is continued differs depending  
on the screen that was displayed when  
the machine was turned off.  
• If the machine was turned off while an  
operation was not being performed, the  
pattern type selection screen appears.  
If the operation in the pattern editing  
screen is finished:  
That pattern editing screen appears.  
If the machine was turned off after a  
pattern is selected and while the pattern  
type selection screen or the pattern list  
screen is displayed:  
To continue the operation being performed  
before the machine was turned off  
Touch  
.
3
The pattern editing screen for the  
selected pattern appears.  
If the machine was turned off while the  
embroidering settings screen is  
displayed:  
The embroidering settings screen for that  
pattern appears.  
If the machine was turned off while  
embroidering:  
The embroidering screen appears with  
the needle positioned at the stitch being  
sewn when the machine was turned off.  
X Depending on the screen that was displayed  
before the machine was turned off, the  
pattern editing screen, the embroidering  
settings screen or the embroidering screen  
appears.  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the Needle  
If the needle is bent or the tip of the needle is broken, replace the needle with a new one. Use the included allen  
screw driver to replace the needle with one that is designed specifically for this machine and that passes the test  
described in “Checking the needle” (on page 15).  
• Do not apply extreme force when loosening  
or tightening the needle set screw, otherwise  
the machine may be damaged.  
Replacing the needle  
Turn off the embroidery machine.  
1
3
CAUTION  
Be sure to turn off the embroidery  
machine before replacing the needle,  
otherwise injuries may result if the  
machine starts sewing.  
With the flat side of the needle toward the  
back of the machine, insert the needle all the  
way up until it touches the needle bar stopper.  
Pass the needle through the hole in the presser  
foot, and then use the needle changing tool to  
lift up the needle.  
3
Loosen the needle set screw and remove the  
2
needle.  
Hold the needle with your left hand, and then  
hold the allen screw driver in your right hand  
and turn the needle set screw  
counterclockwise.  
1
2
4
3
1 Needle bar stopper  
2 Needle  
3 Flat side of needle  
4 Needle changing tool  
Note  
Be sure to use the included allen screw  
driver to replace the needle, otherwise too  
much force may be applied to the needle,  
causing it to break.  
Changing the Needle 63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OTHER BASIC PROCEDURES —————————————————————————————————————————————  
As shown in the illustration, press 1 to extend  
the needle-mounting clamp 2. Attach the  
clamp to the needle, and then release the  
pressed area to clamp the needle. To unclamp  
the needle, press 1 again.  
While holding the needle in place with your  
4
left hand, tighten the needle set screw.  
Use the allen screw driver to turn the needle  
set screw clockwise.  
CAUTION  
Be sure to insert the needle all the way  
up until it touches the needle bar stopper  
and securely tighten the needle set screw  
with the allen screw driver, otherwise the  
needle may break or the machine may be  
damaged.  
If the needle is not fully inserted, the  
hook of the automatic needle-threading  
mechanism will not pass through the eye  
of the needle during automatic needle  
threading, and the hook may bend or the  
needle cannot be threaded.  
If the hook of the automatic needle-  
threading mechanism is bent or  
damaged, contact your authorized  
retailer.  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Correctly Using the Embroidery Frames  
The various types of embroidery frames and their uses are described below. In addition to the included  
embroidery frames, the optional cap frame can be used with this embroidery machine.  
CAUTION  
Only use embroidery frames of the sizes indicated in the screen, otherwise the embroidery  
frame may hit the presser foot, which may result in injuries.  
Embroidery frame types and applications  
Extra-large  
embroidery frame  
Medium embroidery  
frame  
Large embroidery frame  
Small embroidery frame  
3
Embroidering area:  
Embroidering area:  
Embroidering area:  
Embroidering area:  
200 mm (H) × 300 mm (W) 130 mm (H) × 180 mm (W) 100 mm (H) × 100 mm (W) 40 mm (H) × 60 mm (W)  
(7-7/8 inches (H) × 11-3/4 inches (W))  
(5-1/8 inches (H) × 7-1/8 inches (W))  
(4 inches (H) × 4 inches (W)) (1-1/2 inches (H) × 2-3/8 inches (W))  
Use when embroidering  
connecting characters or  
Use when embroidering  
Use when embroidering Use when embroidering  
patterns with a size less than standard-sized patterns. small-sized patterns,  
patterns, combined patterns 130 mm (H) × 180 mm (W)  
such as nametags.  
or large embroidery  
patterns.  
(5-1/8 inches (H) × 7-1/8  
inches (W))  
(Refer to “Hooping the Fabric” on page 67.)  
(Refer to “Hooping the Fabric in the Embroidery  
Frame” on page 28.)  
Cap frame  
(optional)  
Note  
<Standard type>  
<Advanced type>  
The embroidery frame indicators show all  
embroidery frame sizes in which the  
embroidery pattern can be sewn. Be sure  
to use an embroidery frame of the most  
suitable size. If the embroidery frame that  
is too large is used, the pattern may be  
misaligned or the fabric may pucker.  
Embroidering area:  
50 mm (H) × 130 mm (W)  
(2 inches (H) × 5-1/8 inches (W))  
Use when embroidering caps.  
Baseball (golf) caps, tulip hats and bucket hats can be  
embroidered with this frame.  
This frame cannot be used with hats having a front area of  
50 mm (2 inches) or less, such as sun visors and children’s  
hats. In addition, it cannot be used with hats that have a  
brim longer than 80 mm (3-1/8 inches).  
(For details on attaching this frame, refer to “Using the  
Optional Cap Frame” on page 169.)  
Correctly Using the Embroidery Frames 65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OTHER BASIC PROCEDURES —————————————————————————————————————————————  
Attaching Iron-On Stabilizer (Backing) to Fabric  
In order to prevent shrinkage of the stitching or misaligned patterns, we recommend that iron-on stabilizer  
(backing) be used for embroidering.  
CAUTION  
When embroidering on thin or stretch fabrics, fabrics with a coarse weave or fabrics that  
easily allow the stitching to shrink, be sure to use iron-on stabilizer (backing) for  
embroidering. If iron-on stabilizer (backing) is not used while embroidering, the needle may  
bend or break or the pattern may become misaligned.  
Using a steam iron, affix the iron-on stabilizer  
(backing) to the back of the fabric.  
1
Note  
Use a piece of iron-on stabilizer (backing)  
that is larger than the embroidery frame.  
When framing the fabric in the embroidery  
frame, be sure that the stabilizer (backing) is  
clamped on all edges in order to prevent  
wrinkles in the fabric.  
1
2
1 Adhesive side of iron-on stabilizer (backing)  
2 Fabric (wrong side)  
• When embroidering fabric that should not  
be ironed or when embroidering an area that  
1
2
is difficult to iron, hoop a layer of the iron-on  
stabilizer (backing) under the fabric in the  
embroidery frame without ironing it.  
1 Area of embroidery frame  
2 Iron-on stabilizer (backing)  
Memo  
When embroidering thin fabrics, such as  
organza or lawn, use a water-soluble  
stabilizer (backing). Water-soluble  
stabilizers dissolve when washed, allowing  
you to create beautiful embroidery that is  
not stiff.  
When embroidering fabric with a nap, such  
as towels or corduroy, hoop a layer of iron-  
on stabilizer (backing) under the fabric in  
the embroidery frame without ironing it.  
For other uses of stabilizer (backing), refer to  
“Stabilizers (Backing)” on page 165.  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hooping the Fabric  
lightly pull the fabric in the direction indicated  
by arrow D and insert corner D.  
• Be sure that there are no wrinkles in the  
fabric after it is stretched in the embroidery  
frame.  
Hooping the fabric in the extra-large  
and large embroidery frames  
Loosen the screw on the outer frame.  
1
1
While stretching the fabric even more,  
securely tighten the screw so that the fabric is  
taut.  
4
3
1 Screw  
Place the fabric with right side up on top of  
the outer frame.  
2
• After stretching the fabric, lightly tapping it  
should produce a drum-like sound.  
• Firmly clamp together the inner and outer  
frames so that their tops are even.  
4
2
3
1
• The outer frame does not have a front or  
back side. Either side can be used as the  
front.  
1 Outer frame  
2 Inner frame  
3 Right side of fabric  
4 Top of inner & outer frames are even  
• Using the included disc-shaped screwdriver,  
firmly tighten the screw.  
Press the inner frame into the outer frame.  
First insert the inner frame at the corner with  
the screw A, next insert the nearby one corner  
B, and then insert the opposite corner C.  
Then insert the opposite corner of non screw  
corner D.  
3
1
1 Disc-shaped screwdriver  
First, align the inner and outer frames at the  
corner with the screw A. Then, while lightly  
pulling the fabric in the direction indicated by  
arrow B so that the fabric is taut, insert the  
inner frame at corner B. In the same way,  
lightly pull the fabric in the direction indicated  
by arrow C and insert corner C, and then  
Memo  
To correctly frame the fabric in the  
embroidery frame, we recommend using a  
flat surface.  
Hooping the Fabric 67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OTHER BASIC PROCEDURES —————————————————————————————————————————————  
Press the inner frame into the outer frame.  
Remove the embroidery sheet.  
4
Using the embroidery sheet  
In order to hoop the fabric so that the pattern will be  
sewn in the correct position, use the guidelines on  
the embroidery sheet to accurately stretch the fabric  
in the frame.  
With a fabric marker, mark the area of the  
fabric you want to embroider.  
1
Place the embroidery sheet on the inner  
frame. Align the guidelines on the embroidery  
2
sheet with the marks that you drew on the  
fabric.  
1 Guidelines  
2 Inner frame  
Gently stretch the fabric, so that there are no  
folds or wrinkles.  
3
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Embroidering the corner of fabric  
When embroidering the corner of a piece of  
fabric, use spray fabric adhesive to attach the  
corner of the fabric to stabilizer (backing), and  
then hoop the stabilizer (backing) in the  
embroidery frame. With fabrics where you do not  
wish to use spray adhesive, baste the fabric to the  
stabilizer (backing).  
Large/small pieces of fabric  
This section provides information on embroidering  
fabric that is either much larger or much smaller than  
the embroidery frame.  
Embroidering large pieces of fabric or heavy  
clothing  
When embroidering large pieces of fabric or  
heavy pieces of clothing, use a clothespin or  
binder clip to fasten the excess fabric to the  
embroidery frame so that it does not hang down  
from the frame. Embroidering with excess fabric  
hanging down from the embroidery frame may  
prevent the frame from moving properly and may  
result in a misaligned pattern.  
1
2
3
1 Fabric  
2 Stabilizer (backing)  
Embroidering narrow pieces of fabric, such as  
ribbon  
When embroidering narrow pieces of fabric, use  
spray fabric adhesive to attach the fabric to  
stabilizer (backing), and then hoop the stabilizer  
(backing) in the embroidery frame. With fabrics  
where you do not wish to use spray adhesive,  
clamp both ends of the fabric, together with the  
stabilizer (backing), in the embroidery frame.  
• Use a clothespin or binder clip to fasten the  
excess fabric to the embroidery frame.  
Embroidering small pieces of fabric  
When embroidering pieces of fabric that are  
smaller than the embroidery frame, use spray  
fabric adhesive to attach the fabric to stabilizer  
(backing) hooped in the embroidery frame. With  
fabrics where you do not wish to use spray  
adhesive, baste the fabric to the stabilizer  
(backing).  
1
2
1 Ribbon  
2 Stabilizer (backing)  
1
2
1 Fabric  
2 Stabilizer (backing)  
Hooping the Fabric 69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OTHER BASIC PROCEDURES —————————————————————————————————————————————  
Embroidery Frame Position and Movement  
The following provides information concerning the embroidery frame when operating the embroidery machine.  
Embroidery frames that cannot be used for  
embroidering  
Moving to the correct position  
If the center of the embroidery frame is at the  
needle drop point in the embroidering area, the  
embroidery frame is correctly positioned, in other  
words, at the starting position before  
embroidering.  
As explained on page 28, the embroidery frame  
indicators at the top of the screen show the  
embroidery frames that can be used to sew the  
currently selected pattern.  
Embroidery frames with an embroidering area  
smaller than the pattern cannot be used. In  
addition, the embroidery frame cannot be used if  
the embroidery is smaller than the embroidering  
area but is positioned so that it extends out of the  
embroidering area of the frame.  
If the embroidery frame is changed, the next  
frame that is installed will not be correctly  
positioned.  
For example, if the extra-large embroidery frame  
is replaced with the small frame, the following  
will occur.  
Embroidery frames with an embroidering area  
smaller than the pattern  
1
Patterns that extend out of the embroidering  
area of the frame  
In either of these cases, a message appears on the  
embroidery machine, warning that the  
embroidery frame must be changed.  
2
1 Center of embroidery frame at the correct position  
2 Needle position when the embroidery frame is  
replaced  
In order to correct the misalignment of this  
embroidery frame, the embroidery frame  
automatically moves to the correct position when  
any of the following are performed.  
• The embroidery machine is turned on.  
The embroidery frame will move.  
• The embroidering settings screen is displayed.  
The embroidery frame will not move if it is  
correctly positioned.  
If the pattern extends out of the embroidering  
area for the frame, a message appears,  
indicating that the embroidery frame should be  
replaced. Either replace the embroidery frame  
or return to the pattern editing screen and  
move the embroidering position.  
The embroidery machine detects which  
embroidery frame is installed according to the  
position of the left arm of the embroidery frame  
holder. Therefore, the embroidery frame size is  
determined by the position of the left arm, even if  
the detected embroidery frame is not actually  
installed. In addition, if the embroidery frame  
holder is not installed, the embroidery machine  
determines that the cap frame (sold separately) is  
installed.  
A message indicating that the embroidery frame  
be replaced may appear even if no embroidery  
frame is installed.  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• The embroidery frame is replaced while the  
embroidering settings screen or embroidering  
screen is displayed, and then the key for  
checking the embroidering area, for moving  
the embroidery frame, or for starting  
embroidering is touched.  
The embroidery frame will move.  
Since the embroidery frame is moved to the  
correct position and paused, touch the desired  
key again.  
If the pattern extends out of the embroidering  
area for the frame after the frame is moved, a  
message appears, indicating that the  
embroidery frame should be replaced. Either  
replace the embroidery frame or return to the  
pattern editing screen and adjust the pattern  
size or embroidering position.  
3
Embroidery Frame Position and Movement 71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OTHER BASIC PROCEDURES —————————————————————————————————————————————  
Changing the Embroidering Position  
When the embroidery machine is purchased, it was adjusted so that the beginning of the stitching was from the  
center of the pattern. Therefore, move the frame and adjust the embroidering position so that the center of the  
pattern aligns with the needle drop point at the sewing position. In addition, the angle of the entire pattern can  
be adjusted if the fabric cannot be hooped evenly within the embroidery frame and the pattern is positioned at  
an angle on the fabric.  
Touch  
and  
screen.  
,
,
,
,
,
,
• Touch  
to move the embroidery frame  
1
back to its original position (where the  
center of the embroidery frame is aligned  
with the needle drop point at the sewing  
position).  
in the embroidering settings  
Move the embroidery frame so that the needle  
drop point is at the center of the area where  
you wish to embroider.  
Finding the sewing position  
By locking the needle bar (securing the needle  
and presser foot in the down position), the needle  
drop point can easily be seen.  
As shown in the illustration, insert the allen  
screwdriver into the square hole in the needle  
clamp to slowly lower the needle bar down till  
needle bar stops then clicks into the lock  
position.  
X The embroidery frame moves in the  
1
opposite direction of the arrow.  
X The pattern in the pattern display area  
moves in the same direction of the arrow.  
Note  
Make sure that the needle is not lowered  
beyond the positioning click into the fabric.  
1 Shows the vertical distance moved  
2 Shows the horizontal distance moved  
X The needle and presser foot are locked in  
the down position.  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Touch the arrow keys in the embroidery  
settings screen to move the embroidery frame  
so that the needle drop point is at the center  
of the area where you wish to embroider.  
2
Adjusting the angle  
Depending on the type of fabric being embroidered,  
it may not be possible to stretch the fabric in the  
embroidery frame at the desired angle. In this case,  
adjust the angle of the pattern so that it is correctly  
positioned on the fabric.  
Touch  
.
1
• When specifying the starting of stitching,  
align the needle drop point with the point  
specified as the starting of stitching. (For  
details on specifying the starting/ending of  
stitching, refer to page 89.)  
Unlocking the needle bar  
3
The screen shown below appears.  
Display the embroidering screen, and then  
1
touch the key for any needle bar other than  
the one that is locked.  
X The needle bar is unlocked.  
Example: Original angle  
1 Rotates 90 degrees to the left  
2 Rotates 10 degrees to the left  
3 Rotates 1 degree to the left  
4 Rotates 90 degrees to the right  
5 Rotates 10 degrees to the right  
6 Rotates 1 degree to the right  
7 Touch this key to return the pattern to its original  
angle.  
8 Moves the pattern in the direction of the arrow on  
the key.  
9 Enables the embroidering area to be  
checked  
0 Touch this key to close this screen.  
Changing the Embroidering Position 73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OTHER BASIC PROCEDURES —————————————————————————————————————————————  
Touch the keys to adjust the pattern to the  
desired angle.  
Each touch of a key rotates the pattern.  
2
Memo  
With this operation, fine adjustments can be  
made to the angle; also, this operation is  
particularly useful when embroidering  
items, such as bags and tubular items, that  
have limitations to being hooped in the  
embroidery frame.  
Example: When embroidering a pillowcase  
Rotate the pattern 90 degrees to the left  
before embroidering.  
1 Shows the angle of the pattern after a key is  
touched to change it  
• To return the pattern to its original angle  
(0 degrees), touch  
to  
so that it changes  
.
If necessary, touch the arrow keys to adjust  
the position of the pattern.  
For more details, refer to page 72.  
3
4
5
If necessary, touch  
embroidering area.  
to check the  
For more details, refer to page 32.  
After making the desired changes, touch  
Example: When embroidering a T-shirt  
Rotate the pattern 180 degrees. Pass the  
machine bed through from the waist of the T-  
shirt, not from the neck, and attach the  
embroidery frame to the machine. Prevent  
the neck to be stretched when the  
.
The embroidering settings screen appears again.  
Memo  
embroidery frame is moved.  
If  
is touched to return to the pattern  
editing screen after the entire pattern is  
rotated, the pattern appears as it did before  
the rotation angle was specified, but the  
setting is not cancelled. When the  
embroidering settings screen is displayed  
again, the pattern appears with the rotation  
angle applied. However, if an error occurs,  
for example, if the pattern is enlarged in the  
pattern editing screen so that it extends out  
of the embroidering area when it is rotated,  
the following error message appears.  
1 Touch  
to return to the pattern editing  
screen so that the pattern can be re-edited.  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Embroidering a Pattern Containing Seven or More Colors  
When embroidering a pattern that uses seven or more thread colors, it is necessary to change the thread spools.  
When changing the thread spools, instruction to change the thread spools will appear with the machine  
automatically stopping.  
Since the thread colors on needle bars 2 and 3 will be  
used again after the thread spools are changed, they will  
not be replaced. However, different colors are assigned  
to the other needle bars.  
Assignment of thread colors to needle bars  
Thread colors are automatically assigned by the  
machine to needle bars 1 to 6, starting with the  
thread colors that are sewn first. (However, if a  
new pattern has thread colors that are the same as  
the previously sewn pattern, the thread colors will  
be assigned to the same needle bar as before,  
regardless of the sewing order.)  
Checking if thread spool  
changes are necessary  
For example, for a pattern with six thread colors  
and ten thread color changes, the thread colors  
are assigned as shown below.  
When selecting a pattern, the number of thread  
changes can be viewed, however, which thread  
colors are used in the pattern cannot be checked on  
this screen. Whether or not and when thread spools  
will need to be changed can be checked with the  
following indicators.  
3
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
6
5
6
Needle bar 1  
Needle bar 2  
Needle bar 3  
Needle bar 4  
Needle bar 5  
Time until the spools must be changed  
This indicator shows the amount of time until the  
next spool change. When the embroidering  
screen is displayed, if a length of time appears  
here, at least one spool change will be required.  
Needle bar 6  
For a pattern with seven or more thread colors,  
the thread spool information is updated when the  
seventh thread color is needed.  
Afterward, the machine adjusts the assignment of  
thread colors to reduce the number of times that  
the thread spools will have to be changed.  
For example, for a pattern with ten thread colors  
and thirteen thread color changes, the thread  
colors are assigned as shown below.  
1 Time until the spools must be changed  
1
2
3
4
5
6
5
7
3
8
9
10  
2
Needle bar 1  
Needle bar 2  
Needle bar 3  
Needle bar 4  
Needle bar 5  
Needle bar 6  
Change thread spools here.  
Needle bar 1  
Needle bar 4  
Needle bar 5  
Needle bar 6  
Embroidering a Pattern Containing Seven or More Colors 75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OTHER BASIC PROCEDURES —————————————————————————————————————————————  
Spool change indicator (  
)
Check the position of  
.
3
The spool change indicator in the stitch  
navigating screen indicates the number of times  
that the thread spools will need to be changed  
and the amount of time between changes.  
Touch  
in the embroidering screen.  
1
1
indicates when the thread spools will  
need to be changed. The thread spools will need  
to be changed the number of times that this  
indicator is displayed and between the two  
thread colors at the point where it is displayed.  
X The stitch navigating screen appears.  
Touch  
.
2 Touch  
to scroll up through thread color  
2
sequence display. Each time this key is touched,  
the previous color in the thread color sequence  
display is selected. After reaching the first color in  
the thread color sequence display, the scrolling  
stops.  
After checking the desired information, touch  
4
or  
to return to the first color.  
.
And then touch  
X Each time this key is touched, the next color  
in the thread color sequence display is  
selected. After reaching the last color in the  
thread color sequence display, the scrolling  
stops.  
X The embroidering screen appears again.  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the Thread Spools with Designs of Seven or More Colors  
This section contains details on understanding the change thread spools message and on easily changing the  
thread spools.  
Memo  
Change thread spools  
message  
To use a different thread color than the one  
that was specified, use temporary needle  
bar setting key, and then change the thread  
color setting. (For details, refer to  
“Temporary Needle Bar Setting” on  
page 94.)  
When it is necessary to replace the thread spool  
while embroidering a pattern that contains seven or  
more colors, the machine automatically stops sewing  
and the message shown below appears. This  
message also appears when it is necessary to change  
the thread spools before beginning to embroider a  
new pattern. Change the thread spools according to  
their new assignments.  
To minimize changing the thread spools,  
frequently used thread colors can be  
specifically assigned to certain needle bars.  
(For details, refer to “Reserved Needle Bar  
Settings” on page 96.)  
3
1 The needle bars where the thread spools must be  
changed appear in color.  
2 The needle bars where it is not necessary to  
change the thread spools appear in gray.  
3 Touch this key to close the message indicating  
that the thread spool be changed.  
Note  
When the embroidering screen is displayed,  
the current thread color assignment is  
stored. If the same thread color is used the  
next time that the thread spools must be  
changed, the needle bar will be assigned  
the same thread color as before.  
Changing the Thread Spools with Designs of Seven or More Colors 77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OTHER BASIC PROCEDURES —————————————————————————————————————————————  
Pull out the old thread just after the needle  
4
bar thread guide.  
Easily changing the thread  
spools  
When replacing the thread spools, it is necessary to  
re-thread the upper thread. However, the thread  
spools can easily be changed when replacing a  
thread spool whose thread is correctly threaded  
through the machine.  
Cut the thread between the thread spool and  
the thread guide.  
1
Continue pulling the thread until the knot is  
above the needle. Cut the knot.  
Use the automatic needle-threading  
mechanism to thread the needle with the new  
thread. (Refer to page 39)  
5
Change the thread spool.  
2
X This completes the changing of the thread  
spool.  
Note  
When pulling out the thread, do not pull the  
knot through the eye of the needle. If the  
knot is pulled through the eye of the needle,  
the needle may be damaged.  
Tie the end of the thread on the new spool  
with the end of the thread remaining from the  
previous color.  
3
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If the Thread Breaks or the Bobbin Thread Runs Out While Embroidering  
If the thread breaks or the bobbin thread runs out while embroidering, the machine will automatically stop.  
Since some stitches may be sewn with only one thread, go back through the stitching to a point where stitches  
have already been sewn before continuing embroidering.  
The embroidery frame moves. Go back to the  
point where stitches have already been sewn.  
Note  
Be careful when going back or forward  
through the stitching since the embroidery  
frame moves at the same time.  
If the upper thread breaks  
Re-thread the upper thread. (Refer to  
page 35.)  
3
If the needle bar is moved back too far  
1
through the stitching, touch  
or  
Touch  
.
to go forward through the stitching.  
2
1 Each touch of this key moves one stitch forward  
through the stitching.  
2 Each touch of this key moves ten stitches forward  
through the stitching.  
X The stitch navigating screen appears.  
Touch and to go back through  
3
the stitching to a point where stitches have  
already been sewn.  
Touch  
.
4
X The embroidering screen appears again.  
1 Each touch of this key moves one stitch back  
through the stitching.  
2 Each touch of this key moves ten stitches back  
through the stitching.  
Touch  
, and then press the start/stop  
5
button to continue embroidering.  
If the Thread Breaks or the Bobbin Thread Runs Out While Embroidering 79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OTHER BASIC PROCEDURES —————————————————————————————————————————————  
If the bobbin thread ran out, replace the bobbin  
at this point in the procedure.  
If the bobbin thread breaks or  
runs out  
Replace the bobbin with a bobbin wound with  
bobbin thread. (Refer to page 18.)  
3
Touch  
, and then press the thread  
1
trimming button.  
• If the hook cover can be opened, replace the  
bobbin without removing the embroidery  
frame from the machine.  
X The upper thread is trimmed.  
• If the machine bed is hidden, for example,  
with a bag-shaped piece of fabric, or if the  
hook cover cannot be opened, temporarily  
remove the embroidery frame. (Refer to  
page 46.) After replacing the bobbin, re-  
attach the embroidery frame. (Refer to  
page 30.)  
• If the bobbin thread breaks or runs out, also  
trim the upper thread.  
Remove the stitches sewn only with the upper  
thread.  
Pull the trim end of the upper thread.  
2
Note  
If the embroidery frame is removed before  
embroidering of the pattern is finished, be  
careful of the following, otherwise the pattern  
may become misaligned.  
Do not apply extreme pressure to the  
framed fabric and cause it to become loose.  
When removing and re-attaching the  
embroidery frame, do not allow the frame to  
hit the carriage or the presser foot.  
If the carriage is hit and moves, turn the  
machine off, then on again. The correct  
frame position at the time that the machine  
was stopped is stored in the machine’s  
memory, and the embroidery frame is  
returned to the correct position.  
• If the stitches cannot be cleanly removed,  
trim the thread with scissors.  
When the embroidery frame is re-attached,  
make sure that the pins on the left and right  
arms of the embroidery frame holder  
securely fit into the holes in the handles on  
the embroidery frame.  
Go back through the stitching in the same way  
4
as that described in step  
2
of “If the upper  
thread breaks” on page 79, and then continue  
embroidering.  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Embroidering From the Beginning or Middle of the Pattern  
If you wish to restart embroidering from the beginning, for example, if trial embroidery was sewn and an  
incorrect thread tension was used or if the wrong thread color was used, restart the embroidering using the  
forward/backward stitch key. In addition, you can go forward or back through the stitching by thread color or by  
stitch to start stitching at any position of the pattern.  
To start sewing from the beginning  
Note  
Touch  
.
Be careful when going back or forward  
through the stitching since the embroidery  
frame moves at the same time.  
3
Press the start/stop button to stop the  
machine.  
1
3
1 Touch this key to return to the beginning of the  
first color.  
X The embroidery frame moves to the starting  
position.  
• If necessary, change the fabric framed in the  
embroidery frame or trim and remove the  
sewn stitches.  
Touch  
.
2
X The stitch navigating screen appears.  
Embroidering From the Beginning or Middle of the Pattern 81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OTHER BASIC PROCEDURES —————————————————————————————————————————————  
To select the stitch from where embroidering is  
After selecting the stitch from where  
embroidering is to begin, touch  
4
to begin  
.
Touch  
the thread color sequence, and then touch  
and  
and  
to select a color in  
3
,
,
,
,
to select the stitch.  
X The embroidering screen appears again.  
Touch , and then press the start/stop  
5
button to begin embroidering.  
X Embroidering begins from the specified  
point.  
1 Touch this key once to return to the beginning of  
the stitching for the color being sewn. Afterward,  
each touch of this key returns to the beginning of  
sewing for the previous thread color.  
2 Each touch of this key advances to the beginning  
of sewing the next thread color.  
3 Each touch of this key moves one stitch back  
through the stitching.  
4 Each touch of this key moves ten stitches back  
through the stitching.  
5 Each touch of this key moves one hundred  
stitches back through the stitching.  
6 Each touch of this key moves one stitch forward  
through the stitching.  
7 Each touch of this key moves ten stitches forward  
through the stitching.  
8 Each touch of this key moves one hundred  
stitches forward through the stitching.  
9 The thread color at the top of the thread color  
sequence display is the color of the area currently  
selected.  
0 Touch this key to close this screen.  
X The needle bar case moves and the current  
needle bar moves to the sewing position,  
and then the embroidery frame moves and  
current needle position is indicated.  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Resume Embroidering After Turning OFF the Machine  
In either of the following cases, the remaining stitches of the embroidery are stored in the machine’s memory.  
• If the machine's power switch is pressed to turn off after stopping embroidering.  
Cut the thread before the machine's main power switch is turned off, otherwise the thread may be pulled or  
may catch when the carriage returns to its initial position after the machine is turned on again.  
• If the machine was accidentally turned off, for example, due to a power outage, while it was embroidering.  
The remainder of the embroidery can be sewn when the machine is turned on again; however, some of the  
stitches that were already sewn may be sewn again.  
Set the main power switch to “I” to turn on  
the machine.  
1
Note  
Be careful when going back or forward  
through the stitching since the embroidery  
frame moves at the same time.  
3
When the screen shown below appears after  
2
the initial screen, touch  
.
X A message appears, asking if you wish to  
continue embroidering or start a new  
operation.  
Resume Embroidering After Turning OFF the Machine 83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OTHER BASIC PROCEDURES —————————————————————————————————————————————  
Touch  
.
Touch  
two or three times to go back  
3
5
two or three stitches.  
1 Touch to continue embroidering.  
2 Touch to cancel embroidering and display the  
pattern type selection screen to select a new  
pattern.  
1 Each touch of this key moves one stitch back  
through the stitching.  
• Check that the needle drop point is  
positioned where stitches have already been  
sewn.  
X The embroidering screen displayed before  
the machine was turned off appears.  
Touch  
.
6
Touch  
.
4
X The embroidering screen appears again.  
Touch , and then press the start/stop  
7
button to continue embroidering.  
Memo  
The machine can be stopped at any time,  
even while it is embroidering; however, if  
the machine is stopped when the thread  
color is changed, it is not necessary to go  
back through the stitching when  
embroidering is continued. The machine  
can also be set to stop when the thread  
color is changed. (For details, refer to  
“Setting the Machine to Stop at Color  
Changes” on page 92.)  
X The stitch navigating screen appears.  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjusting the Thread Tension  
The following procedure describes how to adjust the thread tension if the correct thread tension as described on  
page 45 was not used. After adjusting the tension of the bobbin thread, adjust the tension of the upper thread for  
each needle bar.  
Note  
Be sure to check the tension of the bobbin thread each time that the bobbin is changed.  
Depending on the bobbin thread type and whether a prewound bobbin is used, the tension of the  
bobbin thread may differ. For example, when replacing an empty prewound bobbin with one of the  
same type, be sure to check the tension of the bobbin thread and adjust the tension if necessary.  
Be sure to adjust the tension of the bobbin thread before adjusting the tension of the upper thread.  
As shown in the illustration, hold the bobbin  
2
case against a smooth vertical surface.  
Adjusting the tension of the  
bobbin thread  
3
Tie the included weight to the end of the  
thread extending from the bobbin case.  
1
• If the thread with the weight attached is  
slowly pulled out, the thread tension is  
correct.  
Note  
Different weights are used to adjust pre-  
wound bobbins and metal bobbins.  
Pre-wound bobbins: Only weight (L)  
Metal bobbins: Weight (L) and weight (S)  
* Weight (S) is included with the optional  
bobbin winder.  
Use the included standard screwdriver to turn  
the tension-adjusting screw and adjust the  
thread tension.  
3
1
2
3
1 Tension-adjusting screw  
2 Tighter  
3 Looser  
Adjusting the Thread Tension 85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
OTHER BASIC PROCEDURES —————————————————————————————————————————————  
After making the adjustments, try  
embroidering with all needle bars to check  
the thread tension.  
Upper thread is too tight  
4
The tension of the upper thread is too tight,  
resulting in the bobbin thread being visible from  
the right side of the fabric.  
(Right side)  
(Wrong side)  
Memo  
In the built-in embroidery patterns, one  
pattern is used for checking the thread  
tension. By sewing this pattern, the thread  
tension can easily be checked. For details,  
refer to page 160.  
Turn the knob in the direction of the arrow to  
decrease the tension of the upper thread.  
Adjusting the tension of the  
upper thread  
1 If the red line is visible, the thread tension cannot  
be decreased any further. Increase the tension of  
the bobbin thread. For details, refer to page 85.  
Turn the thread tension knobs.  
1
3
Note  
1
2
If you decrease the thread tension further  
than the red line, the tension knob may be  
dis-assembled.  
4
Upper thread is too loose  
The tension of the upper thread is too loose,  
resulting in a loose upper thread, loose thread  
locks or loops appearing on the right side of the  
fabric.  
1 Thread tension knobs  
2 Tighter  
3 Looser  
4 Mark  
(Right side)  
(Wrong side)  
Turn the knob in the direction of the arrow to  
increase the tension of the bobbin thread.  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
EMBROIDERING SETTINGS  
This chapter contains descriptions on the various embroidering settings, which make  
operation easier.  
Automatic Lock Stitch Setting .................................................................................88  
Starting/Ending Position Settings.............................................................................89  
Repeatedly sewing a pattern along a diagonal / 90  
Maximum Sewing Speed Setting..............................................................................91  
Setting the Machine to Stop at Color Changes ........................................................92  
Stopping the machine at the next color change / 92  
Specifying pause locations before embroidering / 92  
Temporary Needle Bar Setting ................................................................................94  
Reserved Needle Bar Settings..................................................................................96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EMBROIDERING SETTINGS ——————————————————————————————————————————————  
Automatic Lock Stitch Setting  
The machine can be set to automatically sew lock stitches, for example at the beginning of the pattern, before  
sewing each thread color change, and before trimming the thread.  
When the embroidery machine is purchased, this  
function is set ON.  
Specifying that lock stitches be sewn before the  
thread is trimmed.  
Specifying that lock stitches be sewn at the  
beginning of the pattern, at the beginning of  
sewing each thread color change and at the  
beginning of sewing after the thread trim.  
Touch  
Touch  
setting.  
so that it changes to  
.
1
(or ) to select the desired  
Touch  
Touch  
setting.  
so that it changes to  
.
1
(or ) to select the desired  
• Each touch of the key turns the setting either  
on or off.  
• Each touch of the key turns the setting either  
on or off.  
Automatic lock stitch  
setting turned on  
Automatic lock stitch  
setting turned off  
Memo  
Automatic lock stitch  
setting turned on  
Automatic lock stitch  
setting turned off  
The automatic lock stitch setting stays the  
same until the key is touched to turn it off.  
The setting specified before the machine is  
turned off remains selected the next time  
that the machine is turned on.  
Memo  
If the first stitch length is less than 0.8 mm,  
the lock stitch won't be inserted.  
If Thread Trimming is set OFF in setting  
screen, the lock stitch won’t be inserted.  
(See page 149.)  
If Thread Trimming is set OFF in setting  
screen, the lock stitch won’t be inserted.  
(See page 149.)  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Starting/Ending Position Settings  
The machine can set the start point and the ending point separately from the 9 points of the pattern. Those are  
upper-left corner, upper-center, upper-right corner, center-left, center-center, center-right, lower-left corner,  
lower-center and lower-right corner.  
These settings can be used to repeatedly sew a pattern along a diagonal.  
The starting/ending position settings are specified  
from the embroidering settings screen.  
Specifying the starting position  
When the embroidery machine is purchased, both  
the starting position and the ending positions are set  
to the center of the pattern.  
Touch the key for the desired starting position  
setting.  
2
X When a starting position is selected, the  
ending position is automatically set to the  
same position.  
Touch  
.
1
X The embroidery frame moves to the starting  
position.  
Specifying the ending position  
Touch the key for the desired ending position  
setting.  
3
After selecting the desired settings, touch  
4
4
.
X The starting/ending position settings screen  
appears.  
X The embroidering settings screen appears  
again.  
1 Specifies the starting position  
2 Specifies the ending position  
Touch a key to select the setting.  
The highlighted key shows the currently selected  
setting.  
Memo  
The starting/ending position settings do not  
change until the key for a new setting is  
touched. The settings specified before the  
machine is turned off remain selected the  
next time that the machine is turned on.  
Example  
This key is selected.  
3 Touch this key to close this screen.  
Starting/Ending Position Settings 89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EMBROIDERING SETTINGS ——————————————————————————————————————————————  
Sew the first embroidery pattern.  
2
Repeatedly sewing a pattern  
along a diagonal  
Touch  
to display the embroidering  
Example  
screen, and then touch  
start/stop button.  
and press the  
1 Starting position  
2 Ending position  
Specify the upper-left corner as the starting  
position and the lower-right corner as the  
1
ending position.  
After embroidering is finished, the machine  
stops at the lower-left corner of the pattern.  
3
Touch  
in the embroidering settings  
screen to display the starting/ending position  
settings screen.  
Repeat steps  
2
and  
3
three times.  
4
For the starting position, touch  
changes to  
For the ending position, touch  
changes to  
so that it  
so that it  
.
Memo  
If the starting position and ending position  
settings are changed, instead of sewing the  
patterns in a fixed direction, various pattern  
designs are possible.  
.
Touch  
to close the starting/ending  
position settings screen.  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maximum Sewing Speed Setting  
The maximum sewing speed can be set to one of five levels at every 100 rpm between 600 and 1000 rpm. If the  
cap frame is used, the maximum sewing speed can be set to one of five levels at every 50 rpm between 400 and  
600 rpm.  
Maximum sewing speed  
Memo  
Embroidery frame  
Cap frame  
600  
Decrease the sewing speed when  
embroidering on thin, thick or heavy  
fabrics. In addition, the machine embroiders  
more quietly at a slower sewing speed.  
The sewing speed can be changed while  
embroidery is being sewn.  
1
2
3
4
5
1000  
900  
800  
700  
600  
1
2
3
4
5
550  
500  
The maximum sewing speed setting does  
not change until a new setting is selected.  
The setting specified before the machine is  
turned off remains selected the next time  
that the machine is turned on.  
Decrease the sewing speed to 600 rpm,  
when using a weak thread like a metallic  
thread.  
450  
400  
The maximum sewing speed setting is specified from  
the embroidering settings screen or the embroidering  
screen.  
When the embroidery machine is purchased, the  
maximum sewing speed is set to 600 rpm (Cap frame  
for 400 rpm).  
4
To increase the sewing speed, touch  
decrease the sewing speed, touch  
. To  
1
.
X The value between  
and  
changes.  
Maximum Sewing Speed Setting 91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EMBROIDERING SETTINGS ——————————————————————————————————————————————  
Setting the Machine to Stop at Color Changes  
The machine can be stopped at any time; however, if the machine is stopped while it is embroidering, it is better  
to go back a few stitches before continuing sewing to overlap the stitching. If the machine stops at a color  
change, it is not necessary to go back through the stitching before continuing embroidering.  
Stopping the machine at the  
next color change  
Specifying pause locations  
before embroidering  
The machine can be set to stop before sewing the  
next color.  
Pause locations can be specified in the change  
thread color screen, displayed by touching  
.
While sewing the color before the point  
1
Touch  
in the pattern editing screen or  
where you wish to stop the machine, touch  
1
the embroidering settings screen.  
so that it changes to  
.
After finishing sewing the area for the current  
color, the next needle bar moves into position  
and the machine stops before sewing the next  
color.  
2
X
changes back to  
.
• If the machine is temporarily turned off, you  
will be asked if you wish to continue sewing  
or select a new pattern when the machine is  
turned on again.  
X The change thread color screen appears.  
Touch  
and  
so that the color at  
2
the top of the thread color sequence display is  
the color where you wish to stop the machine  
before sewing it.  
Touch  
to continue embroidering.  
(Refer to “Resume Embroidering After  
Turning OFF the Machine” on page 83.)  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• If the machine is temporarily turned off  
when it is stopped at the specified location  
after embroidering, you will be asked if you  
wish to continue sewing or select a new  
pattern when the machine is turned on  
again.  
Touch  
so that it changes to  
.
3
Touch  
to continue embroidering.  
(Refer to “Resume Embroidering After  
Turning OFF the Machine” on page 83.)  
Memo  
X The  
mark appears to indicate where the  
If the machine is temporarily turned off, the  
settings to stop the machine at color  
changes specified before the machine was  
turned off are not cancelled. However, the  
settings are cancelled if a new pattern is  
selected.  
machine will stop.  
If a pattern with the settings to stop the  
machine at color changes is saved, the  
settings to stop the machine at color  
changes are also saved.  
4
1
mark  
Repeat steps  
you wish to specify.  
• Any number of pauses can be specified.  
2
and  
3
for each pause that  
4
5
After specifying the desired settings, touch  
.
X The screen that was displayed before  
was touched appears.  
Setting the Machine to Stop at Color Changes 93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EMBROIDERING SETTINGS ——————————————————————————————————————————————  
Temporary Needle Bar Setting  
After embroidering begins, the machine can be stopped at a color change and a different needle bar can be  
specified for the next color to be sewn.  
By substituting upper thread already threaded on a different needle bar, the time for sewing can be saved. For  
example, similar color thread can be substituted for temporary use.  
While sewing the color before the one that  
you wish to change, touch so that it  
changes to  
Touch the key for the needle bar threaded  
with the thread that you wish to embroider  
with.  
1
3
4
5
.
Touch  
.
X After the color currently being sewn is  
finished, the threads are trimmed and the  
machine stops.  
• The start/stop button can be pressed at the  
color change to stop the machine, but, in  
that case, stop the machine after the threads  
are trimmed.  
Touch  
.
2
X The embroidering screen appears again.  
Touch , and then press the start/stop  
button to begin embroidering.  
X The temporary needle bar setting screen  
appears.  
X Embroidering continues with the specified  
needle bar.  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Memo  
The thread color (needle bar) change  
specified as described above only applies  
until the next color change. If the pattern  
contains another area with the same color  
or when the same pattern is sewn the next  
time, the area is sewn with the original  
color.  
The thread color (needle bar) can be  
changed with this procedure even when the  
machine has been stopped with a specified  
pause or at the time of spool change.  
If the start/stop button was pressed to stop  
the machine while an area was being sewn,  
a temporary needle bar setting cannot be  
applied. The thread color (needle bar)  
cannot be changed in the middle of an area  
that is being sewn.  
4
Temporary Needle Bar Setting 95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EMBROIDERING SETTINGS ——————————————————————————————————————————————  
Reserved Needle Bar Settings  
Normally, the machine automatically assigns thread colors to the needle bars; however, a specific thread color  
can be manually assigned to a certain needle bar. If a needle bar is specified, that needle bar is removed from  
the machine’s automatic assignments and the specified color remains assigned to it.  
By specifically assigning often used thread colors to certain needle bars, the trouble of changing the thread  
spools can be reduced.  
Once a manual needle bar setting is specified, it  
remains applied until the setting is cancelled.  
The manual needle bar settings can be specified in  
the third page of the settings screen.  
Select the color to be assigned to the needle  
bar.  
3
Touch  
,
,
and  
until the  
color that you wish to select from the thread  
table appears enlarged.  
Touch  
, and then touch  
and  
to  
1
display the third page of the settings screen.  
Touch  
,
,
,
,
or  
for the  
2
1 The color that appears enlarged is the color that is  
selected.  
2 Displays the color that is selected and its name  
number of the needle bar that you wish to  
specify.  
X Highlighting a color square moves in the  
direction of the arrow on the key that is  
touched.  
Touch  
.
4
1 Indicates the number of the selected needle bar  
X The color selected in step  
3
is specified.  
1 The selected color of thread and the anchor  
appear on the spool.  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cancelling the setting  
To change the setting, first cancel it, and then  
select the new setting.  
Touch  
,
,
,
,
or  
for the  
1
number of the needle bar whose setting you  
wish to cancel.  
1 Indicates the number of the selected needle bar  
Touch  
.
2
4
1 The anchor disappears from the thread spool.  
X This cancels the manual needle bar setting.  
Reserved Needle Bar Settings 97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
EMBROIDERING SETTINGS ——————————————————————————————————————————————  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
SELECTING/EDITING/SAVING PATTERNS  
This chapter provides details on selecting, editing and saving embroidery patterns.  
Embroidery Data Precautions................................................................................100  
Selecting an Embroidery Pattern ...........................................................................102  
General pattern selection / 102  
Renaissance Alphabet Patterns / 105  
Appliqué alphabet / 107  
Embroidery patterns / 104  
Floral alphabet patterns / 106  
Frame patterns / 108  
Alphabet patterns / 109  
Embroidery patterns stored in the machine / 111  
Computer (USB) / 114  
Embroidery cards (optional) / 112  
USB media (Commercially Available) / 117  
Editing the Embroidery Pattern (Pattern Editing Screen) .......................................119  
Combining patterns / 119  
Selecting the pattern to be edited / 120  
Flipping a pattern horizontally / 121  
Moving a pattern / 120  
Flipping a pattern vertically / 121  
Rotating a pattern / 122  
Changing the size of a pattern / 121  
Changing the text arrangement of a character / 123  
Changing the character spacing / 124  
Changing the thread density (only for some character and frame patterns) / 125  
Specifying multi-color text / 126  
Deleting a pattern / 128  
Changing the colors of the pattern / 127  
Editing the Embroidery Pattern (Embroidering Settings Screen)............................129  
Rotating the entire pattern / 129  
Creating a repeating pattern / 130  
Changing the colors of the pattern / 131  
Editing a Combined Pattern...................................................................................132  
Saving Embroidery Patterns...................................................................................136  
Machine’s Memory / 136  
If the Embroidery Pattern Cannot Be Saved / 136  
USB Media (Commercially Available) / 137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SELECTING/EDITING/SAVING PATTERNS ————————————————————————————————————————  
Embroidery Data Precautions  
Observe the following precautions when using embroidery data other than that created and saved in this  
machine.  
CAUTION  
While using embroidery data other than our original patterns, the thread or needle may break  
when sewing with a stitch density that is too fine or when sewing three or more overlapping  
stitches. In that case, use one of our original data design systems to edit the embroidery data.  
Types of embroidery data that can be used  
• Only .pes, .phc and .dst embroidery data files can be used with this machine. Using pattern data other than  
those saved using our data design systems or sewing machines may cause the embroidery machine to  
malfunction.  
Types of USB Devices/Media that can be Used (through USB Type “A” (host) connector)  
Stitch data can be saved to or recalled from USB media. Use media that meets the following  
specifications.  
USB Floppy disk drive  
USB Flash drive (USB Flash memory).  
USB CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW drives (recalling only)  
Memo  
Stitch/embroidery data cannot be saved using a USB CD-ROM, CD-R or CD-RW drive.  
USB devices/media can be used only through USB Type “A” (host) connector. USB Type “B“ (function)  
connector is only for a computer connection.  
You can also use the following types of media with the USB Memory Card Reader/Writer.  
Secure Digital (SD) Card  
CompactFlash  
Memory Stick  
Smart Media  
Multi Media Card (MMC)  
XD-Picture Card  
Note  
Some USB media may not be usable with this machine. Please visit our website for more details.  
USB hubs cannot be used through USB Type “A” (host) connector. The machine will not recognize the  
above USB devices or USB memory cards through a USB hub.  
The access lamp will begin blinking after inserting USB Devices/Media, and it will take about 5 to 6  
seconds to recognize the Devices/Media. (Time will differ depending on the USB Device/Media).  
Only insert or remove USB media while  
appears in the display, or when prompted to change  
media by a message on the display (see page 117).  
For additional information, refer to the instruction manual included with the USB media that you have  
purchased.  
Memo  
When a file folder is necessary to create, use a computer.  
Letters and numerals can be used in the file names. In addition, if the file name contains no more than  
eight characters, the entire file name will appear on the screen.  
If the file name is more than eight characters long, only the first six characters followed by “~” and a  
number appear as the file name.  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Computers and Operating Systems with the Following Specifications can be Used  
Compatible models:  
IBM PC with a USB port as standard equipment  
IBM PC-compatible computer equipped with a USB port as standard equipment  
Compatible operating systems:  
Microsoft Windows Me/2000/XP  
(Windows 98 requires a driver. Download the driver from our Web site (www.brother.com).)  
Precautions on using the computer to create data  
• If the name of embroidery data file/folder cannot be identified,  
for example, because the name contains special characters or  
symbols, the file/folder is not displayed. If this occurs, change  
the name of the file/folder. It is recommended to use the upper  
and lower case letters, the numbers 0 through 9, the dash “-”,  
and the underline “_”. Do not use comma “,” or period “.” in  
the file name.  
• If embroidery data larger than 200 mm (H) × 300 mm (W)  
(approx. 7-7/8 inches (H) × 11-3/4 inches (W)) is selected, a  
message is shown at the right asking if you wish to rotate the  
pattern 90 degrees.  
Even after being rotated 90 degrees, embroidery data larger than 200 mm (H) × 300 mm (W) (approx. 7-7/8  
inches (H) × 11-3/4 inches (W)) cannot be used. (All designs must be within the 200mm(H) × 300mm(W)  
(approx. 7-7/8 inches (H) × 11-3/4 inches (W)) design field size.)  
For more details, refer to page 113.  
• .pes files saved with the number of stitches or the number of colors exceeding the specified limits cannot be  
displayed. Use one of our original data design systems to edit the embroidery pattern so that it meets the  
specifications (maximum number of stitches: 500,000 stitches; maximum number of color changes: 500;  
maximum number of combined patterns: 100).  
• Do not create folders in USB media or Removable disk. If embroidery data is stored in a folder, that  
embroidery data cannot be displayed by the embroidery machine.  
• Even if the embroidery unit is not attached, the machine will manage embroidery data.  
5
Tajima (.dst) embroidery data  
• .dst data is displayed in the pattern list screen by their file names. (The actual image cannot be  
displayed.) Only the first eight characters of the file name can be displayed.  
• Since Tajima (.dst) data does not contain specific thread color information, it is displayed with our  
default thread color sequence. Check the preview and change the thread colors as desired. For more details,  
refer to page 163.  
Trademarks  
Secure Digital (SD) Card is a registered trademark or a trademark of SD Card Association.  
CompactFlash is a registered trademark or a trademark of Sandisk Corporation.  
Memory Stick is a registered trademark or a trademark of Sony Corporation.  
Smart Media is a registered trademark or a trademark of Toshiba Corporation.  
Multi Media Card (MMC) is a registered trademark or a trademark of Infineon Technologies AG.  
xD-Picture Card is a registered trademark or a trademark of Fuji Photo Film Co. Ltd.  
IBM is a registered trademark or a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.  
Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.  
Each company whose software title is mentioned in this manual has a Software License Agreement  
specific to its proprietary programs.  
All other brands and product names mentioned in this manual are registered trademarks of their  
respective companies. However, the explanations for markings such as ® and ™ are not clearly  
described within the text.  
Embroidery Data Precautions 101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SELECTING/EDITING/SAVING PATTERNS ————————————————————————————————————————  
Selecting an Embroidery Pattern  
Various embroidery patterns are built into this machine. Other than the built-in patterns, various other patterns  
can be selected from embroidery cards (sold separately) and from the computer.  
Memo  
Please refer to page 5 for a list of compatible cards.  
General pattern selection  
The procedure for selecting a pattern differs depending on the type of pattern; however, the general procedure  
for selecting a pattern is described below.  
In the pattern type selection screen, touch the key for the desired category.  
1
Pattern type selection screen  
1 Embroidery patterns  
2 Frame patterns  
3 Alphabet patterns  
6 Appliqué alphabet patterns  
7 Embroidery patterns stored in the machine  
8 Embroidery cards  
4 Renaissance alphabet patterns  
5 Floral alphabet patterns  
9 USB media  
0 Computer (USB)  
In the pattern list screen, which appears next, touch the desired pattern to select it.  
Pattern list screen  
2
1 Pattern keys  
• Touch a pattern to display the following  
information of the pattern.  
5Vertical length of the pattern  
6Horizontal width of the pattern  
7Number of thread color changes  
• If there is more than one page, touch  
• To change the category, touch  
return to the pattern type selection screen.  
• After selecting the pattern, touch 8.  
4 to  
The selection of the pattern is confirmed and  
the pattern editing screen appears.  
2 and  
3 until the desired page is  
displayed.  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When a pattern is selected, the following keys at the right side of the screen allow you to edit the  
pattern.  
3
1 Changing the size of the pattern  
3 Flipping the pattern vertically  
• Each touch of the key changes the setting as  
• Each touch of the key turns the setting either  
shown below.  
on or off.  
Vertical flip turned  
Flipped vertically  
off  
Large  
Medium  
Small  
• If the key appears as  
, the pattern  
• If the key appears as  
, the size of the  
cannot be flipped vertically.  
pattern cannot be changed.  
4 Checking the preview image  
• Touch this key to check that the embroidery  
will be sewn as desired.  
2 Flipping the pattern horizontally  
• Each touch of the key turns the setting either  
on or off.  
(For details, refer to page 27.)  
Horizontal flip  
turned off  
Flipped horizon-  
tally  
5
• If the key appears as  
, the pattern  
cannot be flipped horizontally.  
Selecting an Embroidery Pattern 103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SELECTING/EDITING/SAVING PATTERNS ————————————————————————————————————————  
If necessary, edit the pattern.  
3
Embroidery patterns  
Touch  
.
1
1 The pattern can be flipped horizontally.  
2 The pattern can be flipped vertically.  
3 Checks the preview image.  
X The list of embroidery patterns appears.  
Touch  
.
Select an embroidery pattern.  
4
2
Touch the desired pattern.  
This confirms the pattern selection.  
X The pattern editing screen appears.  
X The selected pattern appears in the pattern  
display area.  
• If the wrong pattern was selected or you  
wish to select a different pattern, touch the  
desired pattern.  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If necessary, edit the pattern.  
3
Renaissance Alphabet Patterns  
Touch  
.
1
1 Touch this key to change the size.  
2 The pattern can be flipped horizontally.  
3 The pattern can be flipped vertically.  
4 Checks the preview image.  
X The list of renaissance alphabet patterns  
appears.  
Touch  
.
4
Select an embroidery pattern.  
Touch the desired pattern.  
2
This confirms the pattern selection.  
X The pattern editing screen appears.  
X The selected pattern appears in the pattern  
5
display area.  
• If the wrong pattern was selected or you  
wish to select a different pattern, touch the  
desired pattern.  
Selecting an Embroidery Pattern 105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SELECTING/EDITING/SAVING PATTERNS ————————————————————————————————————————  
If necessary, edit the pattern.  
3
Floral alphabet patterns  
Touch  
.
1
1 The pattern can be flipped horizontally.  
2 The pattern can be flipped vertically.  
3 Checks the preview image.  
X The list of floral alphabet patterns appears.  
Touch  
.
4
This confirms the pattern selection.  
Select an embroidery pattern.  
Touch the desired pattern.  
2
X The pattern editing screen appears.  
X The selected pattern appears in the pattern  
display area.  
• If the wrong pattern was selected or you  
wish to select a different pattern, touch the  
desired pattern.  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
X The selected pattern appears in the pattern  
display area.  
Appliqué alphabet  
Touch  
.
1
• If the wrong pattern was selected or you  
wish to select a different pattern, touch the  
desired pattern.  
If necessary, edit the pattern.  
4
X The size selection screen appears.  
Select the text size.  
Touch the key for the desired text size.  
2
1 The pattern can be flipped horizontally.  
2 The pattern can be flipped vertically.  
3 Checks the preview image.  
• The character will have the following  
vertical length when the corresponding size  
is selected.  
Touch  
.
5
5
This confirms the pattern selection.  
X The pattern editing screen appears.  
1 Large:  
2 Medium: 68mm (2-11/16 inches)  
3 Small: 49mm (1-15/16 inches)  
122mm (4-13/16 inches)  
X The list of appliqué alphabet patterns  
Memo  
appears.  
• For details on sewing appliqués, refer to  
“Sewing appliqué patterns” on page 156.  
Select an embroidery pattern.  
3
Touch the desired pattern.  
1 Touch this button to change the character size.  
Selecting an Embroidery Pattern 107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SELECTING/EDITING/SAVING PATTERNS ————————————————————————————————————————  
X The selected pattern appears in the pattern  
display area.  
Frame patterns  
Touch  
.
1
• If the wrong pattern was selected or you  
wish to select a different pattern, touch the  
desired pattern.  
If necessary, edit the pattern.  
4
X The list of frame patterns appears.  
In the upper half of the screen, select the  
desired shape for the frame.  
2
Touch the desired frame shape.  
1 The pattern can be flipped horizonatally.  
2 The pattern can be flipped vertically.  
3 Checks the preview image.  
Touch  
.
5
This confirms the pattern selection.  
X The pattern editing screen appears.  
X The available frame patterns appear in the  
lower half of the screen.  
Select a frame pattern.  
Touch the desired pattern.  
3
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If the key for the character that you wish to  
select is not displayed, touch the tab for the  
desired set of characters.  
3
Alphabet patterns  
There are 13 built-in character fonts.  
Touch  
.
1
1 Uppercase letters  
2 Lowercase letters  
3 Numbers/symbols  
X The font selection screen appears.  
4 Accented characters  
5 Touch this key to change the character font.  
Select a character font.  
2
Touch the desired character font.  
X The text input screen for the characters  
shown on the tab appears.  
• To change the character font, touch  
to return to the font selection screen.  
Select a character.  
Touch the desired character.  
4
5
• Touch  
selections.  
or  
for additional  
X The text input screen appears.  
X The selected character appears in the  
pattern display area.  
1 If the wrong character was selected or you wish  
to select a different character, touch  
to  
delete the last character selected, and then touch  
the key for the new character.  
Selecting an Embroidery Pattern 109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SELECTING/EDITING/SAVING PATTERNS ————————————————————————————————————————  
With one character entered, if necessary,  
change the size of the character.  
• If the text is small and difficult to read on the  
screen, touch to check the text.  
5
1 Touch this key to display the text preview screen.  
1 Touch this key to change the size.  
Changing the size  
After selecting the first character, touch  
until the character is the desired size.  
• The next characters that are selected will  
have the new character size.  
• The character size of all entered characters  
cannot be changed after the characters are  
combined. (The size of the entire pattern can  
be changed from the pattern editing screen.)  
After checking the text, touch  
to the text input screen.  
to return  
Note  
Size of the two small fonts  
and  
If necessary, change the text arrangement.  
cannot be changed.  
7
To enter multiple characters, repeat steps  
and until all desired characters are  
3
6
4
entered.  
X The selected characters appear in the  
pattern display area.  
1 Touch this key to change the text arrangement.  
1 If the wrong character was selected or you wish  
to select a different character, touch to  
delete the last character selected, and then touch  
the key for the desired character. Each touch of  
deletes the last character of the text.  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the text arrangement  
Embroidery patterns stored  
in the machine  
Touch  
to display the screen shown below.  
Touch the key for the desired text arrangement.  
After selecting the desired text arrangement,  
Embroidery patterns stored in the machine can be  
recalled. For details on storing a pattern, refer to  
“Saving Embroidery Patterns” on page 136.  
touch  
to return to the text input screen.  
Touch  
.
1
X The list of patterns appears.  
1 Arranges the text on a straight line  
2 Arranges the text on a slanted line  
3 Arranges the text on the outside of a wide curve  
4 Arranges the text on the outside of a sharp curve  
5 Arranges the text on the inside of a wide curve  
6 Arranges the text on the inside of a sharp curve  
7 If text is arranged on a curve, each touch of this  
key decreases the bend of the curve (makes it  
flatter).  
Select an embroidery pattern.  
Touch the desired pattern.  
2
8 If text is arranged on a curve, each touch of this  
key increases the bend of the curve (makes it  
more curved).  
• If the text is arranged using one of the text  
arrangements on this screen, even more  
characters can be entered.  
5
After entering all of the text as desired, touch  
.
X The selected pattern appears in the pattern  
8
display area.  
This confirms the pattern selection.  
X The pattern editing screen appears.  
Memo  
The color of the text is set to black. To  
change the color, refer to “Specifying multi-  
color text” on page 126 and “Changing the  
colors of the pattern” on page 127.  
1 Shows the amount of free space in the machine’s  
memory.  
2 Touch this key to delete the selected pattern from  
the memory.  
• If the wrong pattern was selected or you  
wish to select a different pattern, touch the  
key for the desired pattern.  
Selecting an Embroidery Pattern 111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SELECTING/EDITING/SAVING PATTERNS ————————————————————————————————————————  
Deleting embroidery data  
From this screen, the embroidery data stored in  
the machine’s memory can be organized by  
Embroidery cards (optional)  
deleting unnecessary data.  
After selecting the pattern that you wish to delete,  
Insert the embroidery card into the machine’s  
embroidery card slot.  
1
With the side of the embroidery card marked  
with an arrow facing toward you, fully insert  
the card into the embroidery card slot on the  
right side of the operation panel.  
touch  
to display the screen shown below.  
1 Permanently deletes the data from the memory,  
then returns to the data with no pattern selected.  
2 Does not delete the data, then returns to the  
screen before  
was touched.  
Touch  
.
3
This confirms the pattern selection.  
X The pattern editing screen appears.  
Note  
Only insert or remove embroidery cards  
while  
appears in the display or  
while the embroidery machine is turned off.  
Make sure that the embroidery card is  
inserted with the side marked with the  
arrow facing toward you, do not insert the  
card with extreme force, and do not insert  
any object other than embroidery cards into  
the slot, otherwise the machine may be  
damaged.  
If an embroidery card other than our  
original embroidery cards are used, the  
embroidery machine may not operate  
correctly. Be sure to use only recommended  
embroidery cards.  
Some licensed or copyright cards may not  
be compatible with this embroidery  
machine.  
Please refer to page 5 for a list of  
compatible cards.  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Touch  
.
Touch  
to return to the pattern list screen.  
2
Memo  
Perform the same operation when a pattern  
larger than 200 mm(H) × 300 mm(W)  
(7-7/8 inches (H) × 11-3/4 inches (W)) is  
selected, whether from the computer or  
USB media.  
X The list of patterns on the embroidery card  
appears.  
Select the pattern as described on page 104 to  
111.  
3
With patterns larger than 200 mm(H) × 300 mm(W)  
(7-7/8 inches (H) × 11-3/4 inches (W))  
When a pattern larger than 200 mm(H) × 300 mm(W)  
(7-7/8 inches (H) × 11-3/4 inches (W)) is selected, the  
following message appears.  
5
Touch  
to rotate the pattern 90 degrees  
before opening it.  
If the data is larger than 200 mm(H) × 300 mm(W)  
(7-7/8 inches (H) × 11-3/4 inches (W)) even after it is  
rotated 90 degrees, the following message  
appears.  
Selecting an Embroidery Pattern 113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SELECTING/EDITING/SAVING PATTERNS ————————————————————————————————————————  
Computer (USB)  
Note  
The connectors on the USB cable can only  
be inserted into a connector in one  
direction. If it is difficult to insert the  
connector, do not insert it with force and  
check the orientation of the connector.  
For details on the position of the USB port  
on the computer (or USB hub), refer to the  
instruction manual for the corresponding  
equipment.  
Using the included USB cable, the embroidery  
machine can be connected to your computer, and  
the embroidery patterns saved on the computer can  
be temporarily recalled and used from the machine.  
Note  
Check that the computer to be connected  
meets the following operating conditions.  
Compatible models:  
Connection through a USB hub may not be  
possible, depending on the operating  
environment. If a connection is not  
possible, connect the cable to the USB port  
of the computer.  
IBM-PC with a USB port as standard  
equipment  
IBM-PC-compatible computer  
equipped with a USB port as  
standard equipment  
Compatible operating systems:  
Microsoft Windows Me/2000/XP  
* Windows 98 SE requires a driver. Download  
the driver from our Web site  
(www.brother.com).  
After the “Removable Disk” folder appears in  
the “My Computer” folder on the computer,  
the connection is completed.  
2
Connecting  
Plug the USB cable connector into the  
corresponding connectors on the computer  
1
and the USB Type “B” (function) port  
connector on the embroidery machine.  
Recalling  
Move/copy the pattern data that you wish to  
1
recall into the “Removable Disk” folder.  
X Pattern data in the “Removable Disk” folder  
is written to the machine.  
1 USB Type “B” (function) connector  
2 USB cable connector  
• The USB cable can be plugged into the USB  
connectors on the computer and embroidery  
machine whether or not they are turned on.  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Memo  
Note  
For details on large-size embroidery  
patterns, refer to PE-DESIGN instruction  
Manual.  
While data is being written, do not  
disconnect the USB cable.  
Do not create folders within the  
"Removable Disk" folder. Even if folders  
have been created, they will not appear in  
the machine's screen.  
• To add a pattern from the computer, repeat  
step  
1
.
While the machine is sewing, do not write  
data to or delete data from “Removable  
Disk”.  
X The following screen appears while data is  
written to the embroidery machine, and the  
key for that pattern appears when writing is  
finished.  
Touch  
.
2
X The list of patterns is displayed.  
Select an embroidery pattern.  
Touch the desired pattern.  
3
• If you decide not to recall the pattern, press  
.
5
Touch  
.
4
This confirms the pattern selection.  
X The pattern editing screen appears.  
Note  
The pattern recalled from the computer is  
only temporarily written to the machine. It  
is erased from the machine when the  
machine is turned off. If you wish to keep  
the pattern, store it in the machine. (Refer to  
“Machine’s Memory” on page 136.)  
X The selected pattern appears in the pattern  
display area.  
• If the wrong pattern was selected or you  
wish to select a different pattern, touch the  
desired pattern.  
Selecting an Embroidery Pattern 115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SELECTING/EDITING/SAVING PATTERNS ————————————————————————————————————————  
If the desired pattern cannot be recalled  
When recalling pattern data from the computer,  
the data is not taken directly from the computer.  
Instead, the pattern data is temporarily written to  
the machine, and that written pattern data is  
recalled. The amount of data written to the  
machine is limited, and pattern data cannot be  
recalled if that data amount is exceeded.  
Disconnecting the USB cable  
Before disconnecting the USB cable, click the  
“Unplug or Eject Hardware” icon in the taskbar of  
®
Windows Me/2000 or the “Safely Remove  
®
Hardware” icon in the taskbar of Windows XP.  
Then, when the removable disk has been  
removed safely, disconnect the USB cable from  
the computer and the machine.  
With Windows 98SE, check that the Access lamp  
is not flashing before disconnecting the USB cable  
from the computer and the machine.  
Note  
Be sure to perform the operation described  
above before disconnecting the USB cable  
from the computer and embroidery  
machine, otherwise the computer may  
malfunction, the data may not be written  
correctly, or the data or data writing area on  
the embroidery machine may be damaged.  
1 Shows the amount of available space in the USB  
area of the machine. If pattern data with this size  
is added, it can be recalled (temporarily written).  
To recall a pattern larger than the amount of  
space available, delete any currently written  
patterns, and then place the pattern that you wish  
to recall into the folder.  
Remove all unnecessary patterns from the  
“Removable Disk” folder on the computer.  
1
Select the pattern data, and then move it to a  
different folder, the Recycle Bin, or right-click  
it and click “Delete”.  
Place the pattern that you wish to recall into  
the “Removable Disk” folder.  
2
X After writing the data to the embroidery  
machine, the key for that pattern appears in  
the screen.  
If the desired pattern can still not be written,  
3
repeat steps  
1
and  
2
.
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
USB media  
(Commercially Available)  
Note  
Only insert or remove USB media while  
appears in the display or while the  
embroidery machine is turned off.  
You can recall a specific embroidery pattern from  
either directly USB media or a folder in the USB  
media. If the embroidery pattern is under the folder,  
move down layers of folders following a path to it.  
For details on storing a pattern, refer to “Saving  
Embroidery Patterns” on page 136.  
Do not insert anything other than USB  
media into the USB media port connector.  
Otherwise, the USB media drive may be  
damaged.  
Note  
Touch  
.
2
USB media and reader/writer units can be  
purchased at electronic/computer retailers.  
Some USB media may not be usable with  
this machine. Please visit our web site for  
more details.  
Insert the USB media into the machine’s USB  
Type “A” (host) port.  
1
Depending on the type of USB media being  
used, either directly plug the USB device into  
the machine’s USB port on the right side of the  
operation panel or plug the USB Card Reader/  
Writer into the machine’s USB Type “A” (host)  
port.  
X A list of patterns and folders at the topmost  
level are displayed.  
• The pattern list is usually displayed within a  
few seconds; however, if there are many  
patterns, it may take some time for them to  
be displayed. While the patterns are being  
read, do not remove the USB media. Instead,  
wait until the patterns are displayed.  
• After recalling data from USB media, if other  
data is recalled from the same USB media  
without removing the card, the list of  
patterns in the folder containing the  
5
previously selected pattern is displayed.  
To select a pattern in a lower-level folder,  
select the folder.  
3
When connecting the USB Card Reader/Writer  
to the machine’s USB Type “A” (host) port, be  
sure to secure the cable with the three hooks  
on the back panel. If the cable is not secured,  
the embroidery frame may catch on the cable  
while the frame is moving, causing the pattern  
to become misaligned.  
Selecting an Embroidery Pattern 117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SELECTING/EDITING/SAVING PATTERNS ————————————————————————————————————————  
X The list of folders and patterns in the  
Deleting embroidery data  
selected folder are displayed in order.  
From this screen, the embroidery data stored on  
the USB media can be organized by deleting  
unnecessary data.  
After selecting the pattern that you wish to delete,  
touch  
to display the screen shown below.  
1 Shows the name of the current folder  
2 Shows the folder in the current folder  
If the folder name is more than nine characters  
long, the name changes to the first six characters  
followed by "~" and a number.  
3 Touch this key to move up one folder level.  
4 Shows the amount of available space in the USB  
media  
1 Deletes the data, then returns to the data with no  
pattern selected  
2 Does not delete the data, then returns to the data  
before  
was touched  
Select an embroidery pattern.  
Touch the key for the desired pattern.  
4
• Press  
to return to the original screen.  
Note  
To delete the USB media pattern data,  
delete it from the PR-600II. This will delete  
design data completely.  
Touch  
.
5
This confirms the pattern selection.  
X The pattern editing screen appears.  
X The selected pattern appears in the pattern  
display area.  
Note  
Do not unplug the USB media or eject the  
floppy disk or CD while a stitch pattern is  
being read or deleted, otherwise the USB  
media may be damaged or data may be lost.  
In addition, do not unplug the USB media  
or eject the floppy disk or CD while the  
contents of the USB media, floppy disk or  
CD are displayed.  
1 Touch this key to delete the selected pattern.  
X If the wrong pattern was selected or you  
wish to select a different pattern, touch the  
key for the desired pattern.  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing the Embroidery Pattern (Pattern Editing Screen)  
The patterns can be edited from the pattern editing screen and the embroidering settings screen. Individual  
patterns can be edited with the pattern editing screen, and the entire pattern can be edited with the  
embroidering settings screen. The results of editing the pattern can be seen in the pattern display area.  
Select an embroidery pattern.  
Select the pattern to be added as described on  
2
Combining patterns  
page 102 to 118.  
Various patterns, such as embroidery patterns, frame  
patterns, built-in alphabet patterns and patterns on  
embroidery cards, can easily be combined.  
Touch  
.
1
• When another pattern is selected, it is  
normally added at the center of the pattern  
display area.  
Repeat steps  
combined are selected.  
1
and  
2
until all patterns to be  
3
X The pattern type selection screen appears  
again.  
Note  
Up to 100 patterns can be combined. More  
than 100 cannot be selected for combining.  
In addition, combining cannot continue if  
there is no more free space in the machine’s  
memory or if the maximum number of  
5
colors allowed (500 colors) is exceeded.  
Memo  
1 Touch this key to quit trying to combine patterns.  
The position of individual patterns and  
other editing operations can be performed  
from the pattern editing screen. The editing  
operations can be performed in the same  
way from the pattern editing screen whether  
it is displayed as each pattern is selected or  
after all patterns that you wish to combine  
have been selected.  
The pattern editing screen appears.  
Editing the Embroidery Pattern (Pattern Editing Screen) 119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SELECTING/EDITING/SAVING PATTERNS ————————————————————————————————————————  
Moving a pattern  
Selecting the pattern to be  
edited  
Determine where in the embroidery frame the  
pattern will be embroidered. If multiple patterns are  
combined, move each pattern to lay out the design.  
If multiple patterns are selected, you can choose  
which pattern will be edited.  
Touch the key for the direction where you  
wish to move the pattern.  
1
Touch  
or  
.
1
The pattern that will be edited is the pattern  
enclosed by the red frame.  
Continue touching  
and  
until  
the red frame is around the pattern that you  
wish to edit.  
X The pattern moves in the direction of the  
arrow on the key.  
X The patterns are selected in the order or the  
opposite order that they were added to the  
pattern.  
1 Shows the vertical distance moved  
2 Shows the horizontal distance moved  
• To return the pattern to its position before it  
was moved (center of the embroidery frame),  
touch  
.
1 Red frame indicating the pattern to be edited  
Memo  
If multiple patterns appear in the pattern  
editing screen, the basic editing procedure  
is to 1. select the pattern to be edited, and  
then 2. edit that pattern.  
Memo  
The pattern can also be moved by touching  
the arrow keys in the screens that appear  
when any of the other editing keys are  
touched.  
The arrow keys in the embroidering settings  
screen are used to move the frame to select  
the embroidering position.  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Flipping a pattern horizontally  
Changing the size of a pattern  
The size of the pattern can be increased or decreased  
to between 90% and 120% of its original size.  
Touch  
so that it changes to  
.
1
Touch  
.
1
X The pattern is flipped horizontally .  
• Each touch of the key turns the setting either  
on or off.  
X The screen shown below appears.  
Horizontal flip turned off  
Flipped horizontally  
Flipping a pattern vertically  
Touch  
so that it changes to  
.
1
5
Example: Original size  
1 Reduces without changing the  
height-to-width proportion.  
2 Reduces only in the vertical  
direction.  
3 Reduces only in the horizontal  
X The pattern is flipped vertically.  
direction.  
• Each touch of the key turns the setting either  
on or off.  
4 Enlarges without changing the  
height-to-width proportion.  
5 Enlarges only in the vertical  
direction.  
Vertical flip turned off  
Flipped vertically  
6 Enlarges only in the horizontal  
direction.  
7 Touch this key to return the pattern to its original  
size.  
8 Moves the pattern in the direction of the arrow on  
the key.  
9 Touch this key to close this screen.  
Editing the Embroidery Pattern (Pattern Editing Screen) 121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SELECTING/EDITING/SAVING PATTERNS ————————————————————————————————————————  
Touch the keys to adjust the pattern to the  
desired size.  
2
Rotating a pattern  
Each touch of a key slightly enlarges or reduces  
the pattern.  
The pattern can be rotated between 1 and 359  
degrees either clockwise or counterclockwise.  
Touch  
.
1
The size of the pattern is displayed after a key  
is touched to change it.  
1 Vertical length  
2 Horizontal width  
• The size that the pattern can be enlarged  
depending on the pattern or character.  
• Depending on the pattern or character, if it is  
rotated 90 degrees it may be enlarged even  
more.  
X The screen shown below appears.  
• If the pattern is rotated, the vertical and  
horizontal directions may be reversed.  
• To return the pattern to its original size,  
touch  
so that it changes to  
.
If necessary, touch the arrow keys to adjust  
the position of the pattern.  
For more details, refer to page 120.  
3
4
After making the desired changes, touch  
.
Example: Original angle  
1 Rotates 90 degrees to the left  
2 Rotates 10 degrees to the left  
X The pattern editing screen appears again.  
CAUTION  
After changing the size of the pattern,  
check the icons for the embroidery  
frames that can be used and use only the  
indicated frames. If a frame other than  
those indicated are used, the presser foot  
may hit the embroidery frame and cause  
injuries.  
3 Rotates 1 degree to the left  
4 Rotates 90 degrees to the right  
5 Rotates 10 degrees to the right  
6 Rotates 1 degree to the right  
7 Touch this key to return the pattern to its original  
angle.  
8 Moves the pattern in the direction of the arrow on  
the key.  
9 Touch this key to close this screen.  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Touch the keys to adjust the pattern to the  
desired angle.  
Each touch of a key rotates the pattern.  
2
Changing the text  
arrangement of a character  
Characters can be arranged on a horizontal line, on a  
slant or on an arc.  
Touch  
.
1
1 Shows the angle of the pattern after a key is  
touched to change it.  
• To return the pattern to its original angle  
(0 degrees), touch  
to  
so that it changes  
.
If necessary, touch the arrow keys to adjust  
the position of the pattern.  
For more details, refer to page 120.  
X The screen shown below appears.  
3
4
After making the desired changes, touch  
.
X The pattern editing screen appears again.  
CAUTION  
After changing the angle of the pattern,  
check the icons for the embroidery  
frames that can be used and use only the  
indicated frames. If a frame other than  
those indicated are used, the presser foot  
may hit the embroidery frame and cause  
injuries.  
5
1 Arranges the text on a straight line  
2 Arranges the text on a slanted line  
3 Arranges the text on the outside of a wide curve  
4 Arranges the text on the outside of a sharp curve  
5 Arranges the text on the inside of a wide curve  
6 Arranges the text on the inside of a sharp curve  
7 If touched after selecting a text arrangement on a  
curve, each touch of this key decreases the bend  
of the curve (makes it flatter).  
8 If touched after selecting a text arrangement on a  
curve, each touch of this key increases the bend  
of the curve (makes it more curved).  
Memo  
If  
in the embroidering settings  
screen is used, the entire combined pattern  
can be rotated. (For details, refer to  
9 Moves the pattern in the direction of the arrow on  
the key  
“Rotating the entire pattern” on page 129.)  
If the pattern is too large or the pattern is too  
close to the edge of the embroidery field, all  
of the rotating options may not apply.  
0 Touch this key to close this screen.  
Touch the key of the desired text  
arrangement.  
2
3
After selecting the desired text arrangement,  
the bend of the curve can be adjusted. If  
necessary, touch  
and  
to adjust  
the bend of the curve.  
Editing the Embroidery Pattern (Pattern Editing Screen) 123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SELECTING/EDITING/SAVING PATTERNS ————————————————————————————————————————  
If necessary, touch the arrow keys to adjust  
the position of the pattern.  
4
Changing the character  
spacing  
For more details, refer to page 120.  
After making the desired changes, touch  
.
The spacing between the characters can be made  
wider or narrower.  
5
Touch  
.
X The pattern editing screen appears again.  
1
Memo  
The text arrangement specified when the  
character was selected on page 123 can be  
changed at this point.  
X The screen shown below appears.  
1 Increases the space between characters  
2 Decreases the space between characters  
3 Selects the standard character spacing (original  
character spacing)  
4 Specifies that the thread be trimmed between  
characters  
5 Moves the pattern in the direction of the arrow on  
the key  
6 Touch this key to close this screen.  
Touch the keys to adjust the characters to the  
desired spacing.  
2
Each touch of a key slightly enlarges or reduces  
the character spacing.  
• To return the characters to their original  
spacing, touch  
.
so that it changes to  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Trimming the threads between characters  
If the machine is set to trim the threads between  
the characters, the jumpstitches between the  
characters are reduced and any other necessary  
procedures after embroidering are reduced.  
However, the embroidering time will increase if  
the threads are trimmed between each of the  
characters.  
Changing the thread density  
(only for some character and frame patterns)  
The thread density for some character and frame  
patterns can be changed.  
A setting between 80% and 120% in 5% increments  
can be specified.  
If necessary, specify that the threads be  
trimmed between characters.  
Touch  
.
3
1
Touch  
so that it changes to  
.
• Each touch of the key turns the setting either  
on or off.  
Threads are not  
trimmed.  
Threads are  
trimmed.  
If necessary, touch the arrow keys to adjust  
the position of the pattern.  
For more details, refer to page 120.  
X The screen shown below appears.  
4
5
After making the desired changes, touch  
.
X The pattern editing screen appears again.  
5
1 Selects a less thread density  
2 Selects a more thread density  
3 Touch this key to close this screen.  
Selects a less thread density  
Less  
Standard  
More  
More  
Selects a more thread density  
Less  
Standard  
Editing the Embroidery Pattern (Pattern Editing Screen) 125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SELECTING/EDITING/SAVING PATTERNS ————————————————————————————————————————  
Touch the keys to select the desired thread  
density.  
2
Specifying multi-color text  
Each touch of a key slightly increases or  
decreases the thread density.  
• To return to the original thread density  
(standard), select “100%”.  
The alphabet pattern characters selected on  
page 109 are set to black. The color of the characters  
can be changed using the change thread color key;  
however, to change the color of individual  
characters, touch the Multi Color key to turn it on,  
and then specify the color for each character.  
After making the desired changes, touch  
.
3
Touch  
so that it changes to  
.
X The pattern editing screen appears again.  
1
• Each touch of the key turns the setting either  
on or off.  
Multi-color text  
turned off  
Multi-color text  
turned on  
• For details on changing the thread color,  
refer to “Changing the colors of the pattern”  
on page 127.  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 Color thread table  
Select a color from this table.  
8 Specifies pause locations (Refer to “Specifying  
pause locations before embroidering” on  
page 92.)  
9 Touch this key to close this screen.  
0 Name of the table  
Changing the colors of the  
pattern  
The colors of the pattern can be changed and  
previewed on the screen.  
By changing the colors of the pattern, the same  
pattern can be viewed in various ways.  
Touch  
and  
until the color to be  
2
If your thread colors are registered in a color thread  
table and if you used the table for changing color,  
the thread spools can be assigned with the thread  
colors that you have. And the pattern displayed in  
the screen will appear with colors that are almost the  
same as the actual thread colors  
changed appears at the top of the thread color  
sequence display.  
With this operation, the colors of all patterns will be  
changed, not just those of the pattern being edited.  
Touch  
.
1
1 The thread color for the part of the pattern  
displayed at the top will be changed.  
Touch  
,
,
and  
to select the  
3
new color from the color palette.  
X The change thread color screen appears.  
5
1 The color that appears enlarged is the color that is  
selected.  
2 Displays the name of the selected thread color  
X In the pattern display area, the color of the  
selected part of the pattern is changed.  
1 The part of the pattern in the color at the top of  
the thread color sequence display is the part  
whose color is being changed.  
2 Shows the number of thread color changes. The  
top value shows the position in the sewing order  
for the color at the top of the thread color  
sequence display and the bottom value shows the  
total number of thread color changes.  
3 Selects the previous color in the thread color  
sequence display  
4 Selects the next color in the thread color  
sequence display  
5 Use these keys to select a color from the color  
thread table.  
6 Applies the color change  
Editing the Embroidery Pattern (Pattern Editing Screen) 127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SELECTING/EDITING/SAVING PATTERNS ————————————————————————————————————————  
Touch  
.
4
Deleting a pattern  
Touch  
.
1
X The color change is confirmed.  
• Make sure to touch  
to specify the  
new color, otherwise the thread color is not  
changed.  
X The screen shown below appears.  
Touch  
.
• If the wrong thread color is specified or if  
you wish to change the thread color again,  
select a different thread color, and then  
2
touch  
.
Repeat steps  
all parts that you wish to change are changed.  
2
through  
4
until the colors of  
5
6
After making the desired changes, touch  
.
X The pattern is deleted.  
• To quit deleting the pattern, touch  
.
X The pattern editing screen appears again.  
Memo  
Touch  
to specify pause locations.  
For details, refer to “Specifying pause  
locations before embroidering” on page 92.  
The color thread table can be changed to a  
custom thread that you create to reflect the  
thread colors that you have. (Refer to  
“Custom thread table settings” on  
page 147.)  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Editing the Embroidery Pattern (Embroidering Settings Screen)  
In the embroidering settings screen, a single pattern can be edited if patterns were not combined or an entire  
combined pattern can be edited as a single pattern.  
In addition, the arrow keys can be used to move the pattern in the pattern editing screen or move the  
embroidery frame in the embroidering settings screen. Touching these keys moves the embroidery frame.  
If necessary, touch the arrow keys to adjust  
the position of the embroidery frame.  
3
Rotating the entire pattern  
For more details, refer to page 72.  
The entire pattern can be rotated.  
If necessary, touch  
embroidering area.  
For more details, refer to page 32.  
to check the  
4
5
Touch  
.
1
After making the desired changes, touch  
.
X The embroidering settings screen appears  
again.  
Memo  
X The screen shown below appears.  
If  
is touched to return to the pattern  
editing screen after the entire pattern is  
rotated, the pattern appears as it did before  
the rotation angle was specified, but the  
setting is not cancelled. When the  
embroidering settings screen is displayed  
again, the pattern appears with the rotation  
angle applied. However, if an error occurs,  
for example, if the pattern is enlarged in the  
pattern editing screen so that it extends out  
of the embroidering area when it is rotated,  
the following error message appears.  
5
1 Enables the entire pattern to be rotated.  
2 Enables the embroidery frame to be moved.  
3 Enables the embroidering area to be checked.  
4 Touch this key to close this screen.  
Touch the keys to adjust the pattern to the  
desired angle.  
2
For more details, refer to page 122.  
1Touch  
to return to the pattern editing  
screen so that the pattern can be re-edited.  
Editing the Embroidery Pattern (Embroidering Settings Screen) 129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SELECTING/EDITING/SAVING PATTERNS ————————————————————————————————————————  
Touch  
,
,
or  
to  
Creating a repeating pattern  
2
specify the number of times that the pattern is  
copied. Each touch of a key increases or  
decreases the rows or columns by one.  
The entire pattern can be copied and repeated the  
specified number of times. The pattern can be  
repeated a maximum of 20 times in both the vertical  
and the horizontal directions within the  
embroidering area.  
Touch  
.
1
1 Original pattern  
2 Increases by one row  
3 Decreases by one row  
4 Increases by one column  
5 Decreases by one column  
X The screen shown below appears.  
Touch  
,
,
or  
to  
3
specify the pattern spacing. Each touch of a  
key increases or decreases the spacing  
between patterns in the corresponding  
direction by 5 mm (3/16 inches).  
1 Each touch of this key reduces the number of  
rows by one.  
2 Each touch of this key increases the number of  
rows by one.  
3 Each touch of this key reduces the number of  
columns by one.  
4 Each touch of this key increases the number of  
columns by one.  
5 Decreases the spacing between patterns in a row.  
6 Increases the spacing between patterns in a row.  
7 Decreases the spacing between patterns in a  
column.  
8 Increases the spacing between patterns in a  
column.  
Each touch of these keys increases or decreases the  
spacing between patterns by 5 mm (3/16 inches).  
1 Original pattern  
2 Increases the spacing between rows by 5 mm  
(3/16 inches)  
3 Decreases the spacing between rows by 5 mm  
(3/16 inches)  
4 Increases the spacing between columns by 5 mm  
(3/16 inches)  
5 Decreases the spacing between columns by  
5 mm (3/16 inches)  
6 Spacing between rows  
7 Spacing between columns  
9 Resets the repeating settings. The pattern returns  
to the arrangement before repeating was  
specified.  
0 Moves the embroidery frame in the direction of  
the arrow on the key.  
A Enables the embroidering area to be checked.  
B Touch this key to close this screen.  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The size of the pattern is displayed after a key  
is touched to change it.  
Changing the colors of the  
pattern  
The colors of the pattern can be changed and  
previewed in the screen. The function and operation  
for this key is the same as that for the change thread  
color key in the pattern editing screen.  
Touch  
.
1
1 Repeat spacing (vertical)  
2 Repeat spacing (horizontal)  
• To quit repeating the pattern and return it to  
its original arrangement, touch  
that it changes to  
so  
.
If necessary, touch the arrow keys to adjust  
the position of the embroidery frame.  
For more details, refer to page 72.  
4
5
6
If necessary, touch  
embroidering area.  
to check the  
X The change thread color screen appears.  
For more details, refer to page 32.  
After specifying the desired repeat settings,  
touch  
.
X The embroidering settings screen appears  
again.  
Memo  
5
If  
is touched to return to the pattern  
editing screen after specifying repeat settings,  
the pattern appears as it did before the repeat  
settings were specified, but the settings are not  
cancelled. When the embroidering settings  
screen is displayed again, the pattern appears  
with the repeat settings applied. However, if an  
error occurs, for example, if the pattern is  
enlarged in the pattern editing screen so that it  
extends out of the embroidering area when it is  
repeated, the following error message appears.  
For details on changing the colors, refer to  
page 127.  
2
Memo  
Even if  
is touched to return to the  
pattern editing screen after colors are  
changed, the settings are not cancelled.  
1Touch  
to return to the pattern editing  
screen so that the pattern can be re-edited.  
Editing the Embroidery Pattern (Embroidering Settings Screen) 131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SELECTING/EDITING/SAVING PATTERNS ————————————————————————————————————————  
Editing a Combined Pattern  
Example)  
In this section, we will combine text with floral alphabet pattern, which we  
will then edit.  
Touch  
.
To select the pattern, touch  
.
1
3
X The pattern editing screen appears.  
Touch  
Select  
.
2
.
4
X This pattern will be positioned at the center  
of the embroidery area.  
X The pattern type selection screen appears  
again.  
Touch  
.
5
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Touch  
.
Touch  
and adjust the position of the  
6
9
letters.  
Touch  
.
0
Type “ood”.  
7
Touch the tab for lowercase letters to display  
the lowercase letters input screen, and then  
touch “o”, “o”, then “d”.  
X The pattern type selection screen appears  
again.  
X The selected letters appear at the center of  
the embroidery area.  
As before, touch  
.
a
• To change the size of the pattern, select “o”,  
and then touch  
size.  
to select the desired  
5
• To change the text arrangement, touch  
, and then select the desired text  
arrangement.  
After selecting the characters, touch  
.
8
X The pattern editing screen appears.  
Editing a Combined Pattern 133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SELECTING/EDITING/SAVING PATTERNS ————————————————————————————————————————  
Check the balance of the entire pattern, and,  
Touch  
to select the same font, and  
e
b
if you wish to edit the pattern, touch  
then type “Luck”.  
and  
to select the pattern to be edited.  
After touching “L”, touch the tab for lowercase  
letters to display the lowercase letters input  
screen, and then touch “u”, “c” , then “k”.  
Example: To reduce  
size.  
Touch  
and  
to move the red  
X The selected letters appear at the center of  
f
the embroidery area.  
frame around  
.
After selecting the characters, touch  
.
c
X The pattern editing screen appears.  
Touch  
and adjust the position of  
d
the letters so that they are well balanced.  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Touch  
.
After finishing all editing, touch  
.
g
j
X The embroidering settings screen appears.  
Touch  
to reduce the pattern  
h
proportionately.  
• To return to the pattern editing screen and  
continue editing the pattern, touch  
.
After reducing the pattern, touch  
return to the pattern editing screen.  
to  
i
5
• To adjust other parts of the pattern, touch  
and again, and then adjust  
the pattern as desired.  
• If it is difficult to view the text and the  
pattern, touch  
to preview it. Touch  
to the previous screen.  
, and then touch  
to return  
Editing a Combined Pattern 135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SELECTING/EDITING/SAVING PATTERNS ————————————————————————————————————————  
Saving Embroidery Patterns  
Machine’s Memory  
If the Embroidery Pattern  
Cannot Be Saved  
You can save embroidery patterns that you have  
customized and will use often, for example, your  
name or other pattern combinations, patterns that  
have been rotated or resized, or patterns that have  
had their embroidering position changed.  
If the following screen appears, the embroidery  
pattern cannot be saved because either the machine's  
memory is full or the pattern being saved is larger than  
the amount of space available in the memory. To be  
able to save the embroidery pattern in the machine's  
memory, a previously saved pattern must be deleted.  
Note  
• Do not turn off the machine while the  
“Saving” screen is displayed, otherwise  
you may lose the pattern that you are  
saving.  
Memo  
• It takes a few seconds to save a pattern in  
the machine’s memory.  
• See page 111 for information on  
retrieving a saved pattern.  
• To quit saving, touch  
Deleting saved data  
.
Touch  
.
1
2
X The list of patterns appears.  
With the pattern that you want to save  
1
displayed in the sewing screen, press  
.
Select the pattern to be deleted.  
Touch the pattern.  
Press  
.
2
X The selected pattern appears in the pattern  
• Press  
to return to the previous screen  
display area.  
without saving the pattern.  
X The “Saving” screen appears. When the  
pattern is saved, the previous screen  
appears automatically.  
1 Touch this key to delete the selected pattern.  
2 Shows the amount of free space in the machine's  
memory.  
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• If the wrong pattern was selected or you  
wish to select a different pattern, touch the  
desired pattern.  
USB Media  
(Commercially Available)  
Touch  
.
When sending embroidery patterns from the  
machine to USB media, plug the USB media  
into the machine’s USB Type “A” (host) port.  
Depending on the type of USB media being  
used, either directly plug the USB device into  
the machine’s USB Type “A” (host) port or plug  
the USB Card Reader/Writer into the machine’s  
USB port.  
3
Memo  
Some USB media may not be usable with  
this machine. Please visit our web site for  
more details.  
X The screen shown below appears.  
To delete the data, press  
.
4
Press  
when the pattern you want to  
1
save is in the sewing screen.  
X The pattern is deleted, and if there is  
enough space, the previous screen appears  
automatically.  
5
• To quit deleting, press  
.
Insert the USB media into the USB port  
connector on the machine.  
2
If there is not enough space, delete another  
pattern.  
5
X If the embroidery data was saved  
successfully, the previous screen  
automatically appears.  
• Saving the data takes approximately 10  
seconds.  
a
b
Note  
• Do not turn off the machine while the  
"Saving" message is displayed, otherwise  
the pattern data being saved may be lost.  
1 USB Type “A” (host) port connector for media  
2 USB media  
Recalling stored patterns  
Refer to the appropriate page of "Selecting an  
Embroidery Pattern" according to the media being  
used. (For patterns saved on the machine, refer to  
page 111. For patterns saved on USB media, refer  
to page 117.  
Saving Embroidery Patterns 137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SELECTING/EDITING/SAVING PATTERNS ————————————————————————————————————————  
When connecting the USB Card Reader/Writer  
to the machine’s USB Type “A” (host) port, be  
sure to secure the cable with the three hooks  
on the back panel. If the cable is not secured,  
the embroidery frame may catch on the cable  
while the frame is moving, causing the pattern  
to become misaligned.  
Memo  
Do not insert anything other than USB  
media into the USB media port connector.  
Otherwise, the USB media drive may be  
damaged.  
Press  
.
3
• Press  
to return to the original screen  
without saving.  
X The “Saving” screen is displayed. When the  
pattern is saved, the display returns to the  
original screen automatically.  
Note  
Do not unplug the USB media or eject the  
floppy disk while the "Saving" screen is  
displayed, otherwise the USB media may be  
damaged or data may be lost.  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
BASIC SETTINGS AND HELP FEATURE  
This chapter contains descriptions on the use of the settings key, the machine  
operations key and the help key, introduced on page 21. Details on changing the  
basic embroidery machine settings and viewing operations on the LCD will be  
provided.  
Using the Settings Key...........................................................................................140  
Understanding the settings screen / 140  
Turning the buzzer on or off / 142  
Adjusting the brightness of the LCD / 142  
Changing the language / 143  
Changing the units of measurements / 143  
Changing the thread color information / 145  
Display expanded thread color / 146  
Changing the display guides / 143  
Custom thread table settings / 147  
Specifying jumpstitch trimming / “DST” jump codes for trimming / 149  
Deleting short stitches / 150  
Specifying the remaining length of thread / 150  
Using the Machine Operations Guide Key ............................................................151  
Using the Help Key ...............................................................................................153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BASIC SETTINGS AND HELP FEATURE —————————————————————————————————————————  
Using the Settings Key  
Touch  
(settings key) to change many of the basic embroidery machine settings.  
Understanding the settings screen  
There are five pages in the settings screen. Touch  
and  
in the lower-right corner of the screen until  
the desired page is displayed. The  
key appears on all pages.  
Page 1  
Page 2  
6 CHANGING THE THREAD COLOR DISPLAY  
The color information in the thread color  
sequence display and the needle bar thread  
information can be switched to the color name,  
the thread color number or the sewing time, refer  
to page 145.  
1 Touch to quit specifying settings. The settings are  
confirmed and the screen that was displayed  
before the settings key was touched appears  
again.  
2 The guides (embroidery frame size, centerpoint  
marker, grid and cursor) for the pattern display  
area can be specified.  
3 The TOTAL COUNT counter shows the total  
number of stitches, and the TRIP COUNT counter  
show the number of stitches that have been sewn  
since the machine's last maintenance.  
4 The TOTAL TIME counter shows the total amount  
of time that the machine has been used, and the  
TRIP TIME counter shows the amount of time that  
the machine has been used since its last  
maintenance.  
7 DISPLAY EXPANDED THREAD COLOR  
The thread colors displayed in the thread color  
sequence display and in the needle bar thread  
information can be displayed as a color from the  
machine's built-in color thread table, as a thread  
color from another manufacturer, or as a color  
that is created with PE-Design ver. 5.0 as an  
original color chart.  
If “ON” is selected, choose from the following  
three threads, refer to page 146.  
Original Thread  
Custom Thread 1  
Custom Thread 2  
Use counters 3 and 4 as a standard for performing  
periodic maintenance and for receiving maintenance  
for the machine.  
8 THREAD TRIMMING/“DST“ SETTING  
Specifies whether or not jumpstitches are cut. In  
addition, when using Tajima embroidery data  
(.dst), you can specify whether or not the thread is  
cut according to the specified number of jump  
codes. (Refer to page 149.)  
5 VERSION  
Shows the version of the software installed on this  
embroidery machine  
9 SHORT STITCH DELETE  
Specifies the pitch length of short stitches that are  
to be deleted, refer to page 150.  
0 THREAD TAIL  
Note  
Check with your local authorized Brother  
dealer or at www.brother.com for details on  
available updates.  
Specifies the length of upper thread that remains  
threaded through the needle after the thread is  
trimmed (length of thread passed through the eye  
of the needle), refer to page 150.  
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Page 3  
Page 5  
A RESERVED NEEDLE  
C BRIGHTNESS OF LCD  
A certain thread color can be set to a specific  
needle bar. The specified color remains assigned  
to the needle bar specified here until the setting is  
cancelled. For details on specifying these settings,  
refer to “Reserved Needle Bar Settings” on  
page 96.  
Enables the density or brightness of the screen to  
be adjusted.  
D BUZZER  
Turns the buzzer on or off.  
E UNIT  
Enables the units of measurements that appear in  
the screens to be changed.  
F LANGUAGES  
Page 4  
Enables the display language to be changed. The  
keys and messages appear in the selected  
language.  
Details of each of the settings are described in the  
following sections. After specifying the desired  
settings, touch  
to return to the screen that  
was displayed before the settings screen was  
displayed.  
B CUSTOM THREAD TABLE  
Create a Custom Thread Table from this page. For  
details on create a Custom thread table, refer to  
“Custom thread table settings” on page 147.  
6
Using the Settings Key 141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BASIC SETTINGS AND HELP FEATURE —————————————————————————————————————————  
Turning the buzzer on or off  
Adjusting the brightness of  
the LCD  
If “ON” is selected, the buzzer sounds to indicate  
that a key in the operation panel was pressed or a  
key on the screen was touched. If an error occurs,  
the buzzer sounds to notify you of the error.  
ON: The buzzer sounds.  
OFF: The buzzer does not sound.  
When the embroidery machine is purchased, “ON”  
is selected.  
The brightness of the LCD can be specified from the  
fifth page of the settings screen.  
Touch  
and  
to adjust the brightness  
1
of the screen so that the contents of the  
screens can be clearly viewed.  
The buzzer setting can be specified from the fifth  
page of the settings screen.  
To make the screen lighter, touch  
To make the screen darker, touch  
.
Touch  
(or  
) and select the  
1
desired setting.  
The key appears as  
when “ON” is  
when  
selected, and it appears as  
“OFF” is selected.  
• The number beside  
indicates the  
brightness. Move it to the desired setting.  
When the embroidery machine is  
purchased, “142” was selected.  
• Each touch of the key turns the setting either  
on or off.  
Note  
All or part of the display may sometimes  
become darker or lighter due to temperature  
changes. This is not a sign of a malfunction.  
If the display is difficult to read, adjust its  
brightness. (Refer to “If the LCD cannot be  
read” on page 213.)  
The display may be dark immediately after  
the embroidery machine is turned on. This  
is a normal characteristic of the backlight  
and is not a sign of a malfunction. After  
approximately 10 minutes, the display  
should reach its normal level of brightness.  
If you are not directly facing the display, the  
colors may be distorted or the display may  
be difficult to read. This is a normal  
characteristic of the display and is not a  
malfunction. Be sure to sit in front of the  
display while using it. (Refer to “Adjusting  
the operation panel position” on page 9.)  
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the language  
Changing the display guides  
The display language can be set to any of the  
following.  
ENGLISH, GERMAN, FRENCH, ITALIAN, DUTCH,  
SPANISH, PORTUGUESE, JAPANESE or THAI.  
When the embroidery machine is purchased,  
“ENGLISH” is selected.  
Various settings can be specified for the guides in the  
pattern display area. The embroidery frame size can  
be selected, and the centerpoint marker, grid and  
cursor can be displayed or hidden.  
The guide settings can be specified from the first  
page of the settings screen.  
The language setting can be specified from the fifth  
page of the settings screen.  
Touch  
and  
to select the desired  
1
language.  
The desired language is displayed.  
1 AREA  
Specifies the size of the embroidery frame  
displayed as a guide in the pattern type selection  
screen, pattern list screen and pattern editing  
screen.  
The guide that appears indicates the size of the  
embroidery frame that is actually installed.  
2 GRID  
Displays or hides the centerpoint marker of the  
design (red) and the grid.  
3 CENTER CURSOR  
Displays or hides the needle cursor (green) and  
specifies the type of cursor.  
4 How the guides will appear with the specified  
settings can be previewed here.  
Changing the units of  
measurements  
The units of measurements can be set to millimeters  
or inches.  
When the embroidery machine is purchased, “mm”  
is selected.  
The measurement units setting can be specified from  
the fifth page of the settings screen.  
Size of the embroidery frame  
When the embroidery machine is purchased, the  
extra-large embroidery frame is selected.  
Touch  
and  
to select the desired  
Touch  
measurement units.  
The desired units are displayed.  
and  
to select the desired  
6
1
1
embroidery frame size.  
The embroidering area for the desired  
embroidery frame is displayed.  
Using the Settings Key 143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BASIC SETTINGS AND HELP FEATURE —————————————————————————————————————————  
Embroidering area  
of the extra-large  
embroidery frame  
Centerpoint marker and grid  
The centerpoint is indicated with a red plus sign  
(+).  
The spacing between the lines of the grid  
represent 10 mm (3/8 inches).  
When the embroidery machine is purchased, only  
the centerpoint marker is displayed.  
Embroidering area  
of the large  
embroidery frame  
Touch  
and  
to select whether or not  
1
to display the centerpoint marker and the  
grid.  
The centerpoint marker and grid are displayed  
as specified.  
Embroidering area  
of the medium  
embroidery frame  
Embroidering area  
of the small  
embroidery frame  
Only display  
centerpoint marker  
Embroidery area of  
the optional cap  
frame.  
Only display grid  
Memo  
If the optional cap frame is attached, the  
embroidering area for the cap frame is  
displayed, regardless of the setting selected  
here.  
Display both  
centerpoint marker  
and grid  
Display neither  
centerpoint marker  
nor grid  
144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Center Cursor  
The cursor indicates the current needle drop point  
in the embroidering screen. The center cursor  
appears in green.  
Changing the thread color  
information  
When the embroidery machine is purchased,  
“Display as plus sign (+)” is selected.  
One of eight thread color information categories can  
be selected for the thread colors information  
category in the color information for the thread color  
sequence display and the needle bar thread  
information.  
Thread color number (Embroidery)  
Thread color number (Country)  
Thread color number (Madeira Poly)  
Thread color number (Madeira Rayon)  
Thread color number (Sulky)  
Touch  
and  
to select whether to  
1
display the cursor as a plus sign (+) or as a  
large crossbar and whether to display or hide  
the cursor.  
The center cursor is displayed as specified.  
Thread color number (Robison-Anton)  
Time  
Thread color name (Name of Color)  
When the embroidery machine is purchased, the  
thread color name (Name of color) is selected.  
The thread color display setting can be specified  
from the second page of the settings screen.  
Touch  
and  
to select the desired  
1
thread color display.  
Displayed as a plus  
sign (+)  
Displayed as a large  
crossbar  
The thread colors will be displayed as  
specified.  
Cursor hidden  
Sample displays  
Thread color name  
6
(Name of Color)  
Thread color  
number  
(Embroidery)  
Thread color  
number (Country)  
Using the Settings Key 145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BASIC SETTINGS AND HELP FEATURE —————————————————————————————————————————  
Thread color  
number  
(Madeira Poly)  
Display expanded thread color  
The thread colors displayed in the thread color  
sequence display and in the needle bar thread  
information can be displayed as original colors or  
another manufacturer’s thread colors.  
Thread color  
number  
(Madeira Rayon)  
ON: If the pattern is created by the PE-Design’s  
“User Thread Chart”, the machine will  
display the color and number specified by  
the “User Thread Chart”. Also, the machine’s  
“Custom Thread Table” will be available.  
(See below)  
OFF:The thread colors are displayed by original  
thread color.  
Thread color  
number (Sulky)  
If “OFF” is selected, the thread colors are displayed  
as specified in the procedure described in “Changing  
the thread color information” on page 145.  
Thread color  
number  
(Robison-Anton)  
If “ON” is selected, one of the following three color  
thread can be displayed in the change thread color  
screen.  
Original Thread  
If the thread color has been specified by the  
“User thread chart” in PE-Design, that color  
will be displayed. If no thread color has been  
specified, the machine’s built-in color is  
displayed.  
Time  
Custom Thread 1  
Custom Thread 1, specified with this machine,  
is displayed.  
Custom Thread 2  
Memo  
Custom Thread 2, specified with this machine,  
The thread colors in the thread color  
sequence display and in the patterns in the  
pattern display area are displayed in the  
original thread color (i.e. the thread colors  
that have been built-in the machine). The  
thread color numbers are displayed with the  
number (or the nearest number) for the  
brand specified here.  
is displayed.  
For details on the color thread and the color displays,  
refer to page 163.  
When the embroidery machine is purchased, “OFF”  
is selected.  
The thread color setting can be specified from the  
second page of the settings screen.  
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Touch  
(or  
) and select the  
1
Custom thread table settings  
desired setting.  
The key appears as  
when “ON” is  
when  
The color thread table displayed, for example, when  
changing the colors of a pattern, can be set to an  
original color thread table, created by combining the  
thread color numbers for the thread colors that you  
like and for the brands that you have. Two CUSTOM  
THREAD tables can be created.  
selected, and it appears as  
“OFF” is selected.  
Creating a custom thread  
On the fourth page of the settings screen, colors  
and numbers can be specified for each box in the  
table.  
Touch  
(or  
) to select the  
1
desired thread.  
Touch  
to select CUSTOM THREAD 1  
to select CUSTOM THREAD  
• Each touch of the key turns the setting either  
on or off.  
or touch  
2.  
Touch  
and  
to select the thread.  
2
The desired thread is displayed.  
Select a box in the table.  
Touch and  
2
,
,
until the box  
• If “ON” is selected, but a custom thread  
table is not created, a color thread table with  
no colors specified is displayed.  
that you wish to select appears enlarged.  
6
1 The box that appears enlarged is the box that is  
selected.  
X Highlighting a color square moves in the  
direction of the arrow on the key that is  
touched.  
Using the Settings Key 147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BASIC SETTINGS AND HELP FEATURE —————————————————————————————————————————  
Select the thread color number type.  
Touch and until the desired thread  
Touch  
.
3
5
color number type (brand name) appears.  
X The entered color and number are specified  
for the box selected in step  
2
.
Type in the thread color number.  
4
Touch  
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
,
and  
to type in the  
desired thread color number.  
To delete the setting, touch  
.
If the wrong number is entered, touch  
.
X That color is removed from the thread table  
and the box becomes empty.  
X The entered number is erased.  
148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Repeat steps  
for the other boxes.  
2
through  
5
to specify colors  
6
Specifying jumpstitch trimming /  
“DST” jump codes for trimming  
• To change the color specified in a box,  
delete the previous color, and then specify a  
new one.  
You can specify whether or not jumpstitches are cut.  
In addition, when using Tajima embroidery data  
(.dst), you can specify whether or not the thread is  
cut according to the specified number of jump  
codes.  
ON: The machine cuts the upper and bobbin thread  
before the jumpstitch. When Tajima embroidery data  
(.dst) is used, the machine converts the “jump” code  
to a trim code, based on the number specified on the  
next line.  
Changing the color thread table  
Set “DISPLAY EXPANDED THREAD COLOR” to  
“ON”, and then select the color thread. Refer to  
page 146.  
OFF: The machine does not cut either a jumpstitch  
or the “jump” code in Tajima embroidery data (.dst).  
When the machine is purchased, “ON” is selected  
and the number of jumps is set to “3”.  
The “DST” thread trim settings can be specified from  
the second page of the settings screen.  
Touch  
(or  
) and select the  
1
desired setting.  
The key appears as  
when “ON” is  
when  
selected, and it appears as  
“OFF” is selected.  
6
• Each touch of the key turns the setting either  
on or off.  
Note  
This setting is not applied to the trimming of  
threads between characters in alphabet  
patterns. (Refer to “Trimming the threads  
between characters” on page 125.)  
Memo  
The number of jump codes cannot be  
specified for data other than Tajima  
embroidery data (.dst).  
Using the Settings Key 149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BASIC SETTINGS AND HELP FEATURE —————————————————————————————————————————  
When using Tajima embroidery data (.dst)  
Touch  
and  
to select the pitch size.  
1
If “ON” is selected, touch  
and  
to  
The desired size is displayed.  
2
select the number of feed codes.  
The desired setting is displayed.  
• A value between 0 and 1 millimeters if the  
units of measurements is set to “mm” (or a  
value between 0 and 0.04 inch if the units of  
measurements is set to “inch”) can be  
specified.  
• A value between 1 and 8 can be specified.  
For example, if 3 is specified, sequential 3  
jump codes will be converted to the trim  
code. But sequential 2 jump code will not be  
converted to the trim code, it will be sewed  
as the feed (jump) stitch.  
Specifying the remaining  
length of thread  
This setting specifies whether the length of upper  
thread that remains threaded through the needle after  
the thread is trimmed (length of thread passed  
through the eye of the needle) has a standard tail or  
long tail.  
When the embroidery machine is purchased,  
“standard tail” is selected.  
The setting for the remaining length of thread can be  
specified from the second page of the settings screen.  
Note  
You need to set the jump number same as  
the number that was used when the  
particular Tajima data was created.  
If the jump number is not matched, either  
unexpected trim or no trimming at trim  
expected point will happen.  
Touch  
and  
to select the setting.  
1
Deleting short stitches  
The desired length is displayed.  
If embroidery data other than our original patterns is  
used, the pitch may be too small, which may result  
in the thread or the needle breaking. In order to  
prevent this, the machine can be set to delete stitches  
with a fine pitch. Stitches with a pitch less than that  
specified here can be deleted.  
When the embroidery machine is purchased, “0”  
was selected (delete stitches with a pitch of 0).  
The setting to delete short stitches can be specified  
from the second page of the settings screen.  
• If the machine misses stitches with a  
standard length of thread after it is trimmed,  
select “Long tail”.  
• When using metallic thread, select “Long  
tail”.  
150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Machine Operations Guide Key  
This machine contains information based on the contents of the Operation Manual, such as basic machine  
operations. Touch  
(machine operations guide key), and then select from the four topics that appear to  
display the available information.  
Contents of Categories  
Names of Machine Principal Parts and Their  
Functions  
Example: To learn how to thread the upper  
thread  
Touch  
.
1
2
3
Operations  
X The sewing machine help screen appears.  
Touch  
.
Troubleshooting  
Maintenance  
X The list of basic operations appears.  
Touch  
6
.
X The procedure for threading the upper  
thread appears.  
Using the Machine Operations Guide Key 151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BASIC SETTINGS AND HELP FEATURE —————————————————————————————————————————  
Touch  
to display the next page.  
After checking the procedure, touch  
.
4
5
Touch  
.
1 Next page key  
Touch this key to display the next page.  
2 Previous page key  
6
Touch this key to display the previous page.  
3 Current page number  
4 Total number of pages  
5 Movie key  
Appears only if the procedure for  
• Threading the upper thread  
• Threading the needle  
• Replacing the embroidery frame holder  
• Attaching the cap frame.  
A movie showing the procedure can be  
viewed.  
X The screen that was displayed before  
was touched appears.  
When  
key. While a movie is being shown, the key  
changes to  
changes to  
, touch the  
.
1 Touch this key to display the movie from the  
beginning of the current page.  
2 Touch this key to pause the movie. While the  
movie is paused, the key changes to  
. Touch  
to continue showing the movie.  
3 Touch this key to skip to the next page of the  
movie.  
4 Touch this key to skip to the previous page of the  
movie.  
5 Touch this key to stop the movie and return to the  
illustration.  
152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Help Key  
If help is needed, touch  
(help key) to check an operation or to check the function of a key.  
Example: Viewing help on the function keys in  
After checking the desired key information,  
touch  
3
the pattern type selection screen  
.
Touch  
screen.  
in the pattern type selection  
1
X The screen that was displayed before  
was touched appears.  
X The help screen appears.  
Touch and until the key whose  
2
help information you wish to view appears.  
1 Next page key  
6
Touch this key to display the next page. If the  
next page key is touched while the last page is  
displayed, the first page is displayed.  
2 Previous page key  
Touch this key to display the previous page. If the  
previous page key is touched while the first page  
is displayed, the last page is displayed.  
3 Current page number  
4 Total number of pages  
Using the Help Key 153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
BASIC SETTINGS AND HELP FEATURE —————————————————————————————————————————  
154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
APPENDIX  
This chapter provides descriptions of techniques for sewing applications, pointers for  
creating beautiful embroidery, and details on maintenance procedures and corrective  
measures that should be taken when a problem occurs.  
Appliqué Sewing ...................................................................................................156  
Sewing appliqué patterns / 156  
Using a frame pattern to create appliqués (1) / 157  
Using a frame pattern to create appliqués (2) / 158  
Helpful Tips for the Operation of PR-600II ...........................................................160  
Checking the thread tension of built-in patterns / 160  
Sewing a pattern aligned with a mark on the fabric / 161  
Color thread table / 163  
Colors of Tajima (.dst) embroidery data / 163  
Creating Beautiful Embroidery..............................................................................164  
Threads / 164  
Stabilizers (Backing) / 165  
Hooping Techniques / 166  
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES  
Fabric/stabilizer compatibility chart / 167  
Attaching an optional embroidery frame for industrial embroidery machines ......168  
Using the Optional Cap Frame..............................................................................169  
Cap frame and its accessories / 169  
Types of caps / 170  
Fabric precautions / 171  
Preparing to use the cap frame / 171  
Attaching the standard cap frame to the mounting jig and putting a cap into the frame / 176  
Attaching the advanced cap frame to the mounting jig and putting a cap into the frame / 180  
Installing the embroidery frame holder / 185 Additional digitizing information / 186  
Using the Optional Bobbin Winder.......................................................................188  
Precautions / 188  
Optional bobbin winder and its accessories / 188  
Setting up the optional bobbin winder / 189 Connecting the AC adapter / 189  
Winding the bobbin / 190  
Maintenance .........................................................................................................193  
Cleaning the LCD / 193  
Cleaning the machine surface / 193  
Cleaning around the needle plate / 194  
Oiling the machine / 196  
Cleaning the hook / 193  
Cleaning the bobbin case / 195  
Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................198  
On-screen troubleshooting / 198  
Troubleshooting / 199  
Error messages / 207  
If the LCD cannot be read / 213  
If the machine does not respond when a key is pressed / 213  
Specifications........................................................................................................215  
Embroidery machine specifications / 215  
Index.....................................................................................................................216  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX —————————————————————————————————————————————————————  
Appliqué Sewing  
This section describes the procedure for sewing appliqués.  
Remove the appliqué fabric from the  
embroidery frame, and then carefully cut  
3
Sewing appliqué patterns  
along the sewn cutline.  
Some of the built-in embroidery patterns can be used  
for sewing appliqués. Follow the procedures  
described below to sew appliqués using the patterns  
with “Appliqué Material”, “Appliqué Position” or  
“Appliqué” in the region display at the top of the  
thread color sequence display.  
*Depending on the thread color display setting, the  
display may appear as  
,
or  
Appliqué  
Material  
Appliqué  
Position  
• If the appliqué is cut out along the inside of  
the sewn cutline, the appliqué may not be  
correctly attached to the fabric. Therefore,  
carefully cut out the appliqué along the  
sewn cutline. If this step is not performed  
carefully, the appliqué will not be cleanly  
finished. In addition, carefully remove any  
excess threads.  
.
Appliqué  
Frame the base fabric in the embroidery  
frame, and then sew an “Appliqué Position”  
pattern. The appliqué position is sewn, and  
then the machine stops.  
4
Procedure for sewing appliqués  
Place stabilizer on the back of the appliqué  
fabric.  
1
2
Frame the fabric for the appliqué (from step  
1
) in the embroidery frame, and then sew an  
“Appliqué Material” pattern. The line that  
indicates where the appliqué will be cut out is  
sewn, and then the machine stops.  
156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lightly apply fabric glue or spray adhesive to  
the back of the appliqué piece that was cut  
out, and then attach the appliqué piece to the  
base fabric at the position sewn using the  
5
Using a frame pattern to  
create appliqués (1)  
“Appliqué Position” pattern in step  
4
.
Appliqués can be created by sewing two frame  
patterns of the same size and shape—one sewn with  
straight stitches and the other sewn with satin  
stitches.  
• If an iron-on stabilizer is used to attach the  
appliqué piece to the base fabric, iron the  
pieces together without removing the base  
fabric from the embroidery frame.  
Select a frame pattern sewn with straight  
stitches to embroider onto the fabric for the  
appliqué. Carefully cut outside of the  
stitching.  
1
After attaching the appliqué piece, sew an  
“Appliqué” pattern. The appliqué is finished.  
6
• Depending on the pattern, an “Appliqué”  
pattern may not be available. In this case,  
sew the appliqué using thread in the color of  
a part of the embroidery.  
Embroider the same pattern on the base  
fabric.  
2
Finish sewing the embroidery.  
7
7
Appliqué Sewing 157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX —————————————————————————————————————————————————————  
Lightly apply fabric glue or spray adhesive to  
3
the back of the appliqué piece that was cut  
out in step , and then attach the appliqué  
Using a frame pattern to  
create appliqués (2)  
1
piece to the base fabric.  
There is another way of sewing appliqués. With this  
method, there is no need to change the fabric in the  
embroidery frame. The appliqué can be created by  
sewing two frame patterns of the same size and  
shape—one sewn with straight stitches and the other  
sewn with satin stitches.  
Select a frame pattern sewn with straight  
stitches to embroider onto the base fabric.  
1
Select the satin-stitched frame pattern with  
the same shape to embroider the appliqué  
4
attached in step  
3
.
Place the appliqué fabric over the embroidery  
1
2
sewn in step  
1
. Make sure that the area  
surrounded by the stitching is not larger than  
the area of the appliqué fabric.  
1 Appliqué  
Note  
If the size or sewing position of the straight-  
stitched frame pattern is changed, be sure to  
change the size or sewing position of the  
satin-stitched frame pattern in the same  
way.  
158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Embroider over the appliqué fabric using the  
same frame pattern.  
3
Note  
If the size or sewing position of the straight-  
stitched frame pattern is changed, be sure to  
change the size or sewing position of the  
satin-stitched frame pattern in the same  
way.  
Attach the embroidery frame removed in step  
6
4
, and then finish embroidering the appliqué.  
• Be sure to stop the machine before the cross  
at the center is sewn.  
Remove the embroidery frame from the  
machine, and then cut off the excess appliqué  
fabric along the outside of the stitching.  
4
Note  
Leave the fabric in the embroidery frame  
when cutting off the excess appliqué fabric.  
In addition, do not apply extreme pressure  
to the framed fabric, otherwise the fabric  
could become loose.  
Select the satin-stitched frame pattern with  
the same shape.  
5
7
Appliqué Sewing 159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX —————————————————————————————————————————————————————  
Helpful Tips for the Operation of PR-600II  
This section provides descriptions to operations useful in the operation of this machine.  
Touch  
.
Checking the thread tension  
of built-in patterns  
3
One pattern on the last page of the embroidery  
patterns can be used to check the thread tension. We  
will sew this pattern to check the thread tension.  
Touch  
.
4
Touch  
.
1
Touch  
.
5
Touch  
1 times, and then touch  
.
2
160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Touch  
(unlock key), and then press the  
Sewing a pattern aligned with  
a mark on the fabric  
6
start/stop key to begin embroidering.  
By specifying the beginning of stitching and the end  
of stitching, the exact position of the pattern can be  
checked.  
For example, when sewing text along a line in the  
fabric pattern, the beginning of the stitching can be  
set in the lower-left corner so that the position can be  
checked, and then the beginning of stitching can be  
reset. Next, the beginning of stitching can be set in  
the lower-right corner to check the position. The  
straight line connecting the first point and the second  
point is the baseline for the text. If the baseline that  
the text follows leaves the fabric pattern, the  
embroidering position can be adjusted.  
Correct thread tension. From the wrong side  
of the fabric, the bobbin thread should be  
about one third of the stitch width.  
7
Touch  
in the embroidering settings  
1
screen.  
Note  
If adjustment is necessary, refer to  
instructions on page 45 or 85/86.  
Set the beginning of stitching in the lower-left  
corner.  
2
7
X The frame moves so that the needle drop  
point aligns with the beginning of stitching.  
Helpful Tips for the Operation of PR-600II 161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX —————————————————————————————————————————————————————  
With a fabric marker, mark this point on the  
fabric.  
Remove the embroidery frame from the  
machine, and then connect these two points  
to check the embroidering position.  
3
6
• If the baseline is misaligned or intersects  
another line, reframe the fabric in the  
embroidery frame or adjust the position of  
the pattern.  
Set the beginning of stitching in the lower-  
right corner.  
4
X The frame moves so that the needle drop  
point aligns with the beginning of stitching.  
With a fabric marker, mark this point on the  
fabric.  
5
162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Color thread table  
Colors of Tajima (.dst)  
embroidery data  
Additional explanations of the machine’s built-in  
color thread table and the custom thread table are  
provided below.  
Tajima data (.dst) does not contain pattern color  
information. The data is created by combining only  
shapes.  
For example, the following embroidery data appears  
as shown below in the Tajima format (.dst)  
Normally, the thread colors in the thread color  
sequence display and in the pattern display area are  
displayed in the colors of the machine's built-in  
color thread table. The thread color numbers with  
these thread colors are displayed with the thread  
color number (or the nearest number) for the brand  
specified on the second page of the settings screen.  
Therefore, the finished embroidery colors may have  
a slightly different tinge.  
However, since the custom thread table specified on  
the fourth page of the settings screen are created by  
specifying thread colors by the thread color numbers  
and color names from individual brands in the  
machine’s built-in color library, the thread table is  
displayed with those original thread colors.  
If “CUSTOM THREAD TABLE” is selected and  
“DISPLAY EXPANDED THREAD COLOR” is set to  
“ON”, pattern colors changed using Custom Thread  
can be previewed with colors nearest to the actual  
embroidered thread colors.  
In order for the parts of the pattern to be  
differentiated when Tajima data is used with this  
machine, the pattern is displayed with colors  
automatically applied in the default thread color  
sequence. Since the thread colors are applied  
according to the sewing order of the parts, regardless  
of the design of the pattern, colors may be applied  
that seem unusual for the design, for example, an  
orange-colored fruit may be displayed in blue.  
When using Tajima data, be sure to preview the  
sewn image on the screen and change the colors  
from the change thread color screen.  
Create color thread tables from the colors of threads  
that you have and use them to display the patterns in  
your own thread colors.  
Normal thread color display  
Thread color display using a custom thread  
7
Helpful Tips for the Operation of PR-600II 163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX —————————————————————————————————————————————————————  
Creating Beautiful Embroidery  
The various precautions concerning the thread, embroidery frames and stabilizers (backings) that must be  
observed in order to create beautiful embroidery are described below.  
Temperature and humidity also pose a threat to  
embroidery threads. The ideal conditions are  
Threads  
between 59 °F and 77 °F (or 15 °C and 25 °C).  
Embroidery thread can be costly, therefore caring for  
Humidity should be between 40% and 60%. These  
it should be a priority. No matter how well a thread  
conditions should be kept as constant as possible in  
is manufactured, it must be appropriately stored if it  
order to prevent mildew from forming. Excessive  
is to sew properly. This is especially true when one  
temperatures can also cause lubrication problems  
considers the time that lapses between delivery to  
that ultimately result in thread breaks. Damp  
the thread user and the moment the thread is actually  
conditions can affect paper bobbins as the cardboard  
used on the embroidery machine. It is important that  
will swell and the thread can become oversized. It is  
embroidery threads be stored in an environment that  
also important to realize that even if the overall  
is free of damaging agents such as excessive heat,  
light or moisture.  
storage conditions are good, there may be “spot  
problems” where a thread is exposed to a heat  
source or bright lights. Ensuring that thread does not  
Embroidery threads are best stored in an area that is  
become damaged requires that stock be frequently  
as clean and dust-free as possible. It is also important  
rotated and that threads are not left in the same place  
that the storage area be free of smoke, fumes and  
for an extremely long time.  
gases. Certain gases may cause the thread to yellow.  
These fumes originate from such appliances as gas  
heaters or from gas or diesel engines.  
Choice of thread is a major factor in improving  
production time. The thread run ability, strength,  
consistency and weight all affect output. These  
Direct sunlight is also extremely destructive for  
qualities determine how well the machine will sew  
embroidery threads. Boxes of thread should not be  
and the number of thread breaks during sewing.  
left open and exposed to direct sunlight. If possible,  
skylights and windows should be diffused. The best  
Thread breaks have an important influence on  
type of lighting for embroidery thread is tungsten-  
production. Each thread break reduces output by at  
filament or fluorescent tubes. It is important to  
least 0.07% a day (7.5 hours), assuming that it takes  
remember that prolonged exposure to these harmful  
20 seconds to rethread a needle. For every reduction  
sources may also cause the colors of cardboard  
of 14 thread breaks per a day, output can be  
boxes and other objects to fade.  
improved by more than 1.0 %.  
164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Self-adhesive (peel-and-stick) backing is used on  
those difficult-to-hoop fabrics. This backing is  
applied (with sticky side up) to the underside of  
the frame, enabling your fabric to “stick on” the  
exposed surface in the sewing areas. When the  
embroidery is finished, the fabric can be  
removed, the excess backing can be disposed of  
and the process repeated.  
Stabilizers (Backing)  
Backing and topping serve to stabilize and support  
the product being embroidered so the stitches can be  
sewn with the least amount of interference or  
instability. They serve as stabilizers for your  
embroidery work. Without the proper type of  
stabilizer, the fabric may move too much within the  
embroidery frame causing poor alignment of the  
embroidery. At times, topping will be required in  
order to manage fabrics with a pile-like surface, such  
as towels, corduroy and pique knit. There are many  
types of backing and toppings with various weights  
for the various fabrics that you may be sewing.  
4. Tear-away stabilizer can be used on  
mediumweight woven fabrics and sturdy fabrics  
such as canvas, poplin and denim. This stabilizer  
will hold many stitches especially when used in  
two or more layers. This type of stabilizer is  
made of a non-woven material that enables it to  
easily be torn away from the edges of your  
embroidery design when it is completed. This  
stabilizer is also available in black.  
There are four types of stabilizers (backing) that can  
be used in embroidery: cut-away, tear-away, water  
soluble and self-adhesive. In these four types, various  
weights, sizes and textures are available. When  
selecting the stabilizer type for a particular fabric,  
consider the design size in addition to the stitch  
count and stitch type used in the design.  
5. Water-soluble stabilizer is useful when you need  
to keep the nap or pile, for example, on towels,  
from interfering with the placement of stitches.  
Fabrics such as terry cloth, corduroy, velvet and  
faux fur are examples of materials that have a  
nap or pile that can actually penetrate  
Finally, make sure that the stabilizer is not stretched.  
Some backings may not stretch vertically or  
horizontally but may stretch diagonally. DO NOT  
USE THESE TYPES. This type of backing will stretch  
during sewing and may cause the design to shift.  
embroidery stitches as your machine sews. The  
result is an unfinished and often sloppy  
appearance when fibers of the fabric poke out  
between the finished stitches of an embroidery  
design. In these situations, water-soluble  
stabilizer is used as a topping to hold the fibers of  
the fabric flat so the stitches can be placed on top  
neatly and accurately. Water-soluble stabilizer is  
also used as a backing when stitching lace or  
other motifs where the desired result is only the  
stitching. This is accomplished with water-  
soluble stabilizer, which can easily be pulled off  
of the fabric after embroidering is completed and  
any remnants can be easily be dissolved with  
water. Water-soluble stabilizer is also used as a  
backing on towels, where you often need some  
stabilization, but any remnants of a formal  
backing must not be visible in the finished  
product.  
1. Polyester mesh cut-away stabilizer works  
extremely well with light-colored fabrics since it  
prevents a shadow from showing through on the  
front after you have trimmed away the excess.  
This type of backing is ideal whenever you need  
stability with a light and soft touch in your  
finished product, for example, with baby  
garments.  
2. Cut-away stabilizer is excellent for medium- to  
heavyweight knits, however it can also be used  
on woven material. It will hold a large number of  
stitches and with two or three layers can hold a  
tremendous amount of stitches. This type of  
backing is also available in black for those who  
want the inside of their garments to look as good  
as the outside. Black stabilizer is very useful on  
similarly colored garments of lightweight fabrics.  
The black backing is less likely to show through  
as compared to white backing.  
7
Creating Beautiful Embroidery 165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX —————————————————————————————————————————————————————  
Hooping Techniques  
“Use the right tool for the right job” is a statement  
many of us have heard throughout the years. This  
statement holds true even in the embroidery  
industry. The wrong size or type of embroidery frame  
may result in poor design alignment during sewing  
or damage the product altogether. You can take a  
perfectly created design and ruin the final results by  
simply not using the correct frame size, type or  
technique designed for its application.  
Frame Basics  
Tubular frames: This type of frame allows tubular  
fabric or pre-assembled garments to be placed  
around the hook assembly. It allows embroidering  
of the front of a garment without stitching through  
the back of it.  
Cap frames: These are specialized embroidery  
frames (hoops) designed to hold caps for  
embroidering. They are available in a variety of  
styles for various machines, with two basic styles:  
one that allows sewing a flattened cap (for use on  
a flat machine) or one that allows sewing the cap  
in its natural curved shape (for use on a tubular  
machine).  
Hooping fabric: The framed fabric and backing  
should be perfectly flat and free of wrinkles or  
bubbles. If there are bubbles or wrinkles that must  
be removed, be sure that you pull on the fabric  
and backing together. Pull no more than is  
necessary to make the fabric flat and smooth.  
Overstretching the fabric during this process may  
cause puckers around the finished design when  
the frame is removed. Gaps may also be  
generated between design parts.  
Inner/outer frame positioning: There should be a  
slight ridge (3 mm (1/8 inch)) of fabric and  
backing below the outer frame on the back side.  
Tighten the screw only if the inner frame feels  
loose. Avoid overtightening the screw as this will  
cause puckers in the fabric and may “strip” the  
screw.  
166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fabric/stabilizer compatibility chart  
Fabric/  
Garment  
No. of Backing  
Pieces  
No. of Topping  
Pieces  
Comments  
Increase density and/or satin stitch width.  
Fine details and small lettering tend to get  
caught in the terry loops.  
Terry cloth  
1 tear-away  
1 water-soluble  
If garment slips in frame, causing alignment  
problems, wrap inner frame with masking  
tape or fabric bias tape. This provides a rough  
surface to grip garment and also helps  
minimize frame burn.  
Heavy lining:  
None  
Light or no lining:  
1 tear-away  
Satin jacket  
None  
High-density or highly detailed designs may  
require more backing. If so, use two pieces of  
lightweight backing instead of one piece of  
heavy backing.  
Cotton sheeting  
Denim  
1 tear-away  
1 tear-away  
None  
None  
Reduce speed if needle begins to heat up and  
the thread breaks.  
Change needles more often than usual  
because the buckram backing dulls needles  
faster. A lightweight tear-away backing helps  
reduce thread breaks and regulates thread  
tension. Use a topping on corduroy or foam  
cap fronts.  
Headwear  
Optional  
Optional  
High-density or highly detailed designs may  
require more backing. If so, use two pieces of  
lightweight backing instead of one piece of  
heavy backing.  
Dress shirt  
(woven)  
1 tear-away  
1 cut-away  
None  
Use topping for designs containing small  
lettering or a lot of detail, and also for pique  
knits.  
Golf shirt  
Optional  
Use a topping if the garment has a textured  
surface, such as a basketweave or  
pronounced twill.  
Canton fleece  
Canvas  
1 tear-away  
1 tear-away  
1 tear-away  
Optional  
None  
Frame tightly  
A higher stitch density or more understitches,  
as well as a topping, may be necessary to  
prevent stitches from sinking into the fabric.  
Corduroy  
1 water-soluble  
Reduce sewing speed. The thread tension  
should be low. Use topping for designs with  
high detail or small lettering. For very fine  
fabrics, use a thinner thread. Avoid extremely  
narrow satin stitching on letters or details;  
instead increase satin stitch width or use a  
bean stitch. Gently remove (don’t pull)  
backing and topping from garment.  
1 or 2 lightweight  
tear-away  
Lingerie or silk  
Optional  
7
1 cut-away or  
adhesive tear-  
away  
Use tightly woven organza or curtain fabric in  
a matching color as a backing for bulky or  
“holey” knits.  
Sweater knit  
Sweatshirt  
T-shirt  
1 water-soluble  
Optional  
Highly detailed designs may require two  
layers of lightweight cut-away stabilizer. Use  
a topping on extra-thick fabrics or with fine-  
detail designs.  
1 cut-away or  
adhesive tear-  
away  
1 light-weight cut-  
away or adhesive  
tear-away  
Use a topping on designs with fine detail or  
small lettering. Tensions should be light.  
Avoid stitch-heavy designs.  
Optional  
Creating Beautiful Embroidery 167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX —————————————————————————————————————————————————————  
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES  
Attaching an optional embroidery frame for industrial embroidery machines  
Prepare the embroidery frame holder in order to attach the embroidery frame for industrial embroidery  
machines.  
When the embroidery frame for industrial embroidery machines is attached, both the left and right arms of the  
embroidery frame holder moves.  
Remove the embroidery frame. (Refer to  
page 46.)  
Using a Phillips screwdriver, loosen the two  
screws, and then remove them.  
1
4
Loosen the two thumb screws on the  
embroidery frame holder.  
2
2
1
Remove the right arm, align the pins on the  
embroidery frame holder with the holes in the  
arm, as shown in the illustration, and then  
5
1 Left arm  
2 Thumb screws  
insert the screws removed in step  
tighten them.  
4
and  
X The left arm of the embroidery frame holder  
can be moved.  
• Only loosen the thumb screws a maximum  
of 2 turns counterclockwise. Do not remove  
the screw.  
Move the left arm to align the screw on the  
right side with the mark for the embroidery  
frame for industrial embroidery machines,  
and then tighten the thumb screws.  
3
X The embroidery frame holder is ready for  
the embroidery frame to be attached.  
Attach the embroidery frame for industrial  
embroidery machines in the same way that  
enclosed embroidery frames are attached.  
(Refer to page 30.)  
Note  
When using embroidery frames for  
industrial embroidery machines, THE  
MACHINE DOES NOT RECOGNIZE THE  
SEWING AREA OF THE FRAME. Be sure to  
use the trial sewing function to check that  
the pattern fits within the sewing area.  
1 Mark for embroidery frame for industrial  
embroidery machines  
2 Align the screw with the mark.  
168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Optional Cap Frame  
By using the optional cap frame, patterns can be embroidered onto caps and hats. The procedures for using the  
cap frame are described below.  
Cap frame and its accessories  
The cap frame driver and the mounting jig are required in order to use the cap frame.  
Cap frame  
Cap frame driver and 4 thumb  
screws  
1 Embroidering area:  
50 mm (H) × 130 mm (W)  
(2 inches (H) × 5-1/8 inches (W))  
In order to attach the cap frame to  
the carriage, remove the  
2 The mark indicates the center of the embroidery frame holder, and  
embroidering area.  
3 Snap lock  
then attach this cap frame driver to  
the carriage of the machine.  
1 Insert the thumb screws into  
these holes and tighten the  
screws to secure the movable  
section. Use these holes when  
storing this cap frame driver.  
2 Holding Spring  
<Standard type>  
1
2
The cap frame is secured by  
the two holding Spring.  
3
Mounting jig  
Use when framing a cap in the  
cap frame.  
1
<Advanced type>  
1 Holders  
The cap frame is secured by  
the two holders.  
1
2 Mounting bracket  
Tighten thumb screw to  
secure to mounting surface.  
3 Screws  
2
3
2
Adjust the size of the  
mounting jig according to the  
type of cap being  
3
embroidered.  
Pad  
Allen screwdriver (large)  
Allen screwdriver (medium)  
* Use when adjusting the ring of the cap frame driver and the height of the L-shaped bracket. (Refer to page 173.)  
7
Memo  
Note  
Before installing the cap frame, be sure to adjust the ring of  
the cap frame driver and the height of the L-shaped  
bracket. (If the same machine is being used, this  
adjustment is only required the first time that it is used. In  
addition, this adjustment is not necessary if the enclosed  
cap frame is installed.)  
If the cap embroidery frame is attached, the  
embroidery frame indicators, showing  
which embroidery frames can be used,  
appear as shown below.  
After the ring of the cap frame driver and the height of  
the L-shaped bracket have been adjusted, they must be  
adjusted again if a different machine is being used. The  
height may differ depending on the machine that is  
used. For details, contact your sales representative.  
Using the Optional Cap Frame 169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX —————————————————————————————————————————————————————  
Golf Style  
Types of caps  
5 sections  
Face: Not divided  
With PR-600II, we recommend that the following  
types of caps be embroidered.  
Standard(Pro Style)  
6 sections  
Face: Pro style  
Otto Interna-  
tional, Inc. cap  
OTTO23-225  
model number  
(Example)  
Mesh backing on  
the back of front Constructed  
Otto Interna-  
tional, Inc. cap  
model number  
(Example)  
panels  
firm front  
(soft or hard)  
OTTO27-007  
Ease of framing  
(hooping)  
Fairly easy  
1 to 2 ply  
Mesh backing on  
Backing  
the back of front Constructed  
Unconstructed  
soft crown  
panels  
firm front  
(soft or hard)  
Ease of framing  
(hooping)  
Easy  
Memo  
Fairly easy  
2 to 3 ply  
(Recommended)  
Check if this area 1 is covered with mesh.  
Backing  
1 to 2 ply  
Low Profile (Low fitting)  
6 sections  
Face: Low fitting  
Otto Interna-  
tional, Inc. cap  
Note  
OTTO23-225  
OTTO18-203  
model number  
(Example)  
There is no centerline that can be used as a  
guide for placing the cap in the cap frame.  
Before framing the cap, use a charcoal pen  
to mark the centerline.  
Mesh backing on  
the back of front Constructed  
Unconstructed  
soft crown  
panels  
firm front  
(soft or hard)  
Very difficult  
(because the  
cap material  
very hard.)  
Ease of framing  
(hooping)  
Fairly easy  
2 to 3 ply  
Backing  
1 to 2 ply  
170  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cap fabric not recommended for embroidering  
• Caps with a front panel that is less than  
50 mm (2 inches) high (such as a sun visor)  
• Children’s caps  
Preparing to use the cap  
frame  
• Caps with a brim that is longer than 80 mm  
(3-1/16 inches)  
Installing the cap frame driver  
Press  
in order to view a video of the operation  
Fabric precautions  
on the LCD (see page 151).  
Cap fabric recommended for embroidering  
• 35%Cotton / 65%Polyester  
• 100%Cotton  
Remove the embroidery frame holder from the  
carriage on the machine, and then install the cap  
frame driver. Before removing the embroidery  
frame holder, remove the embroidery frame. (Refer  
to “Removing the embroidery frame” on page 46.)  
• 80%Wool / 20%Nylon  
• 15%Wool / 85%Acrylic  
Cap fabric not recommended for embroidering  
If caps of the following types of fabric are used, they  
will be very difficult to frame, easily wrinkled, or  
easily shrink.  
Loosen and then remove the two thumb  
screws and the embroidery frame holder.  
1
• Polyester Foam  
• Stretch material  
• Melton Wool  
1
• 100%Nylon  
• Suede  
1 Thumb screws  
• The removed thumb screws remain attached  
to the embroidery frame holder.  
1
1 Put the two thumb screws back in the embroidery  
fram holder.  
Remove the two upper thumb screws of the  
cap frame driver and set aside. Loosen the two  
lower thumb screws (4 turns).  
2
7
1
2
1 Upper thumb screws  
2 Lower thumb screws  
Using the Optional Cap Frame 171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX —————————————————————————————————————————————————————  
Pass the machine bed through the ring of the  
cap frame driver.  
Insert the pins on the frame-mounting plate of  
the carriage into the holes in the mounting  
plate of the cap frame driver.  
3
5
1
1
1 Machine bed  
Note  
2
Be careful that the cap frame driver does not  
hit any nearby parts, such as the presser  
foot.  
1 Pins on the frame-mounting plate of the carriage  
2 Holes in the mounting plate of the cap frame  
driver  
Attach the cap frame driver to the carriage as  
described below in steps  
4
through  
6
.
Insert and tighten the two upper thumb  
screws in outer holes of mounting plate of cap  
frame driver.  
6
Insert the two thumb screws at the bottom of  
the cap frame driver into the v-cuts in the  
carriage, and then place the mounting plate of  
the cap frame driver on top of the frame-  
mounting plate of the carriage.  
4
3
4
While pushing in the cap frame driver toward  
the machine so that it is fully inserted, tighten  
the two lower thumb screws to secure the cap  
frame driver.  
7
2
1
1 Notch in the carriage  
2 Thumb screw of the cap frame driver  
3 Mounting plate of the cap frame driver  
4 Frame-mounting plate of the carriage  
X This completes the installation of the cap  
frame driver.  
172  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjusting the cap frame driver  
Lower the L-shaped bracket to make it touch  
the machine bed and then tighten the two  
hexagonal screws using the Allen screwdriver  
(medium). Firmly tighten the screws.  
3
1 L-shaped bracket  
2 Ring  
Memo  
1 L-shaped bracket  
If the same machine is being used, the  
adjustment to the cap frame driver is only  
required the first time that the machine is  
used.  
Using the Allen screwdriver (large), loosen the  
four hexagonal screws on the inside of the  
ring. Loosen the screws only by about one  
turn.  
4
Turn on the machine. After the carriage  
moves to its initial position, turn off the  
1
machine.  
Note  
Be sure to adjust the cap frame driver with  
the carriage at its initial position.  
1 Hexagonal screws  
2 Allen screwdriver (large)  
X When the screws are loosened, the ring can  
Using the Allen screwdriver (medium), loosen  
the two hexagonal screws. Loosen the screws  
be lowered.  
2
only by about one turn.  
Note  
Do not loosen them too far.  
7
1 Hexagonal screws  
2 Allen screwdriver (medium)  
Note  
Do not loosen them too far.  
Using the Optional Cap Frame 173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX —————————————————————————————————————————————————————  
Insert the pad between the machine bed and  
the ring of the cap frame driver.  
Installing the needle plate spacer  
5
Attach the needle plate spacer to the needle plate.  
1
1 Needle plate spacer  
Preparing the mounting jig  
Lower the stopper, and then attach the mounting  
jig to a stable surface, such as a desk.  
1 Pad  
2 Machine bed  
3 Ring of the cap frame driver  
Use a Phillips screwdriver to loosen the two  
screws, and then lower the stopper in the  
direction of the arrow.  
1
Lightly press down the ring, and then use the  
Allen screwdriver (large) to tighten the four  
hexagonal screws on the inside of the ring.  
Firmly tighten the screws.  
6
1 Loosen the screw so that the stopper can be  
hooked onto the screw and clamped with it.  
2 Loosen until the stopper moves.  
3 Stopper  
1 Ring  
CAUTION  
Make sure that each hexagonal screw is  
firmly tightened. If any screw remains  
loosen, injuries may result.  
Remove the pad inserted in step  
5
.
7
174  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Tighten the two screws.  
• Make sure that the stopper is firmly secured.  
Check that there is no looseness.  
If there is looseness, mount the mounting jig  
onto the mounting surface again.  
2
3
4
5
Note  
Be sure that the mounting bracket is  
securely clamped onto the mounting  
surface and that the thumb screw is firmly  
tightened.  
Do not attach the mounting jig to an  
unstable surface (flexible, bent or warped).  
Be careful that the mounting jig does not fall  
when it is removed.  
Attach the mounting jig to a stable mounting  
surface, such as a desk.  
Adjust the size of the mounting jig according  
to the type of cap being embroidered.  
Loosen the thumb screw for the mounting jig  
to open the mounting bracket so that it is  
wider than the thickness of the mounting  
plate.  
6
1
2
1 Low Profile (Low fitting)  
2 Standard (Pro style)  
• The mounting bracket can be mounted onto  
a plate with a thickness from 9 mm (3/8  
inch) to 38 mm (1-1/2 inches).  
Note  
Either the standard type cap frame or the  
advanced type cap frame can be used in the  
standard position. Only the advanced cap  
frame can be used in the low profile  
position.  
Securely clamp the mounting bracket onto the  
mounting surface by tightening the thumb  
screw.  
1
2
7
3
1 Mounting bracket  
2 Mounting surface  
3 Tighten thumb screw  
Using the Optional Cap Frame 175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX —————————————————————————————————————————————————————  
For the standard type  
Using a Phillips screwdriver, turn the four screws  
(two on the left and two on the right) at the inside  
of the mounting jig one turn to loosen them.  
Attaching the standard cap frame to the  
mounting jig and putting a cap into the frame  
Press  
in order to view a video of the operation on  
2
1
the LCD (see page 151).  
Put the cap into the standard cap frame attached to  
the mounting jig, and then remove the standard cap  
frame from the mounting jig with the cap clamped.  
Next, attach the standard cap frame to the cap frame  
driver on the machine.  
1 Screws  
2 Phillips screwdriver  
Attach the standard cap frame to the  
mounting jig.  
1
Note  
Align the notch in the standard cap frame with  
the guiding plate on the mounting jig, and then  
snap the frame into place.  
Do not remove any of the four screws (two  
on the left and two on the right); otherwise,  
they may be lost. Only turn the screws to  
slightly loosen them.  
2
1
Pull the mounting jig toward you, and then use  
the Phillips screwdriver to tighten the four screws  
(two on the left and two on the right).  
3
X This completes the preparation of the  
4
mounting jig.  
1 Guiding Plate on mounting jig  
2 Notch on standard cap frame  
3 Sweat guard holder  
4 Holder  
X The standard cap frame is secured with the  
two holders (clips) one on right side and  
one on left side.  
Note  
Make sure that the mounting jig is set to the  
standard position.  
176  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Release the snap lock on the standard cap  
frame down and then disengage the latch.  
Open the clamping frame. Also, open brim  
presser.  
Lift up (flip) the sweat guard on the inside of  
the cap, and then place the cap in the  
standard cap frame.  
Using both hands, hold both sides of the cap,  
and then align the edge of the lower frame  
with the base of the brim.  
2
4
3
2
1
1 Edge of the lower frame  
2 Sweat guard  
3 Base of the brim  
1 Snap lock released  
2 Clamping frame opened  
3 Brim presser  
At the same time, align the centerline of the  
cap with the centerline of the sweat guard  
holder on the standard cap frame, and then  
slide the sweat guard under the sweat guard  
holder.  
Placing a sheet of stabilizer.  
3
Placing a sheet of about 100 mm (4 inches) x  
250 mm (10 inches) of stabilizer on top of the  
lower frame, place a cap in the frame.  
1 Sweat guard holder  
2 Centerline of sweat guard holder  
3 Centerline of cap  
After arranging the brim, firmly push in the  
cap as far as possible.  
5
1 100 mm (4 inches)  
2 250 mm (10 inches)  
3 Stabilizer  
7
Using the Optional Cap Frame 177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX —————————————————————————————————————————————————————  
Close the clamping frame, and then hook the  
catch of the snap lock to temporarily secure  
it.  
6
Memo  
According to the shape of the cap, loosen  
the screw 4 and adjust the position of the  
clamping frame 3 so that the teeth on the  
inside of the clamping frame 1 align with  
the base of cap brim 2.  
1 Catch of the snap lock  
2 Clamping frame  
Check for the following conditions.  
1 The centerline of the cap is parallel with  
the short side of the clamping frame.  
2 The line on the left side of the cap cannot  
be seen within the clamping frame.  
3 The teeth on the inside of the clamping  
frame cleanly grab the base of the brim.  
4 The centerline of the brim holder and the  
center line of the cap must make a single  
straight line.  
Memo  
If the cap fabric is thick and the clamping  
frame cannot be closed, or if the fabric is  
thin and the cap is too loose within the  
frame, adjust the clamping frame.  
4
3
1
2
1 Teeth on the inside of the clamping frame  
2 Centerline of brim holder  
178  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
While pulling the cap down with one hand,  
pull the lever of the snap lock to securely  
close it.  
As shown in the illustration, use both hands to  
press in on the sides of the brim to reshape it  
so that the sides do not fold out.  
If the pattern is embroidered with the sides of  
the brim folded out, the brim will hit the  
machine and cause the pattern to become  
misaligned.  
7
0
1
1 Lever of the snap lock  
Note  
Make sure that there are no wrinkles within  
the clamping frame. Otherwise miss  
alignment will occurred.  
Stretch the fabric in the embroidering area so  
that it is taut.  
While again pulling on the fabric around the  
cap frame to stretch it, adjust the  
embroidering position.  
a
8
While pressing in on the sides of the brim, the  
fabric within the cap frame may be pressed,  
causing slack in the fabric. Pull the fabric along  
the left, right and center seams in the direction  
of the arrows, and stretch the fabric so that the  
embroidering area is taut.  
Pull the brim holder up as far as possible.  
Next, turn the brim holder over the cap brim,  
and then lower the brim holder. Finally,  
arrange the brim so that it maintains a slightly  
rounded shape.  
9
7
X This completes the positioning of the cap in  
the standard cap frame.  
1 Brim holder  
2 Centerline of brim presser  
• Make sure the notch comes out.  
Using the Optional Cap Frame 179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX —————————————————————————————————————————————————————  
Remove the standard cap frame from the  
mounting jig.  
b
Attaching the advanced cap frame to the  
mounting jig and putting a cap into the frame  
Press both right and left holders on the  
mounting jig with both thumbs, and then pull  
off the embroidery frame, as shown in the  
illustration.  
Put the cap into the advanced cap frame attached to  
the mounting jig, and then remove the advanced cap  
frame from the mounting jig with the cap clamped.  
Next, attach the advanced cap frame to the cap  
frame driver on the machine.  
1
Attach the advanced cap frame to the  
mounting jig.  
1
Align the side of the mounting jig with the  
brace on the cap frame, and then push the cap  
frame into place.  
4
3
1 Holder  
5
6
2
1
1 Side of mounting jig  
2 Brace on cap frame  
• Align the notch in the advanced cap frame  
with the guiding plate on the mounting jig,  
and then snap the frame into place.  
3 Guiding Plate on mounting jig  
4 Notch on advanced cap frame  
5 Sweat guard holder  
6 Holder  
X The advanced cap frame is secured with the  
two holders (clips) one on right side and  
one on left side.  
180  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Release the snap lock on the advanced cap  
frame down and then disengage the latch. Open  
the clamping frame. Also, open brim presser.  
At the same time, align the centerline of the  
cap with the centerline of the sweat guard  
holder on the advanced cap frame, and then  
slide the sweat guard under the sweat guard  
holder.  
2
3
2
1
1 Sweat guard holder  
2 Centerline of sweat guard holder  
3 Centerline of cap  
1 Snap lock released  
2 Clamping frame opened  
3 Brim presser  
Align the centerline of the cap with the notch  
in the mounting jig.  
Secure the stabilizer with the pins on the cap  
frame.  
5
3
1
1
1 Pins  
• Make sure that the pins go through the  
stabilizer to firmly secure it.  
Lift up (flip) the sweat guard on the inside of  
the cap, and then place the cap in the  
advanced cap frame.  
Using both hands, hold both sides of the cap,  
and then align the edge of the lower frame  
with the base of the brim.  
4
2
1 Centerline of cap  
2 Notch in mounting jig  
Place the sweat guard of the cap inside the  
notch in the cap frame.  
6
7
1
1 Edge of the lower frame  
2 Sweat guard  
3 Base of the brim  
1 Notch in cap frame  
Using the Optional Cap Frame 181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX —————————————————————————————————————————————————————  
Close the clamping frame so that the brim of  
the cap passes between the inside clamping  
frame and the outside clamping frame.  
7
Note  
Loosen the two screws for the outside  
clamping frame, and then adjust the  
position of the outside clamping frame so  
that it conforms to the shape of the cap and  
so that the teeth of the clamping frame  
perfectly align with the base of the brim.  
1
3
2
1 Brim  
2 Inside clamping frame  
3 Outside clamping frame  
Neatly align the teeth of the clamping frame  
with the base of the brim.  
8
1
2
1 Teeth of clamping frame  
2 Base of brim  
3 Outside clamping frame  
4 Screws for the outside clamping frame  
Adjust the other side in the same way.  
9
1 Teeth of clamping frame  
2 Base of brim  
Close the lever of the snap lock.  
0
1
1 Lever of the snap lock  
182  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pull the brim holder up as far as possible.  
Next, turn the brim holder over the cap brim,  
and then lower the brim holder. Finally,  
arrange the brim so that it maintains a slightly  
rounded shape.  
c
Note  
If the cap fabric is thick and the clamping  
frame cannot be closed, or if the fabric is  
thin and the cap is too loose within the  
frame, loosen the screw for the inside  
clamping frame, and then adjust the inside  
clamping frame.  
1 Brim holder  
2 Centerline of brim presser  
• Make sure the notch comes out.  
Adjust the brim so that it maintains a rounded  
shape.  
d
1 Inside clamping frame  
2 Screw for the inside clamping frame  
Pull the ends of the cap out from the center to  
remove any slack.  
a
X This completes the positioning of the cap in  
the advanced cap frame.  
Remove the advanced cap frame from the  
mounting jig.  
e
Press both right and left holders on the  
mounting jig with both thumbs, and then pull  
off the embroidery frame, as shown in the  
illustration.  
Use the clips to secure the cap.  
b
1
7
1
1
1 Clips  
• Repeat steps  
a
and  
b
on the other side to  
remove any slack and secure the cap with  
the clips.  
1 Holder  
Using the Optional Cap Frame 183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX —————————————————————————————————————————————————————  
Attaching the cap frame to the embroidery  
machine  
Removing the cap frame  
After embroidering is finished, remove the cap  
The cap frame driver is required in order to attach  
the cap frame to the embroidery machine. Before  
attaching the cap frame to the machine, attach the  
cap frame driver to the carriage. (Refer to  
“Installing the cap frame driver” on page 171.)  
frame, and then remove the cap.  
Remove the cap frame from the cap frame  
driver.  
Press both of the two holders at the base of the  
cap frame with both thumbs, and then pull off  
the embroidery frame, as shown in the  
illustration.  
1
Attach the cap frame to the cap frame driver.  
As shown in the illustration, turn the  
1
embroidering position to the side when  
inserting the cap frame so the brim of the cap  
does not hit the embroidery machine.  
1
1 Holder  
• Be careful that the cap frame does not hit  
any nearby parts, such as the presser foot.  
As shown in the illustration, turn the  
embroidering position to the side when  
removing the cap frame so the brim of the cap  
does not hit the embroidery machine.  
After turning the cap frame so that the  
embroidering surface faces upward, align the  
ring of the cap frame driver with the ring of the  
cap frame. While sliding the cap frame to the  
left and right, align the notch in the cap frame  
with the guiding plate on the cap frame driver,  
and then snap the frame into place.  
2
1
• Be careful that the cap frame does not hit  
any nearby parts, such as the presser foot.  
For the standard cap frame  
Release the snap lock on the cap frame, and  
then remove the cap.  
2
2
1
3
1 Guiding Plate on cap frame driver  
2 Notch on cap frame  
3 Holder  
X The cap frame is secured with the two  
holders one on the right and one on the left.  
This completes the installation of the cap  
frame, and the cap is ready to be  
embroidered.  
184  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For the advanced cap frame  
Remove the two upper thumb screws  
3
1
After removing the brim holder, unlock the  
snap lock of the cap frame, remove the clips,  
2
and then remove the cap.  
1
2
1 Thumb screws  
3
Remove the cap frame driver.  
1 Brim holder  
2 Snap lock  
3 Clips  
4
Installing the embroidery  
frame holder  
After embroidering using the cap embroidery frame  
is finished, remove the needle plate spacer and cap  
frame driver, and then re-attach the embroidery  
frame holder.  
Note  
Remove the needle plate spacer.  
Be careful that the cap frame driver does not  
hit any nearby parts, such as the presser  
foot.  
1
With the hole on the sweat guard holder  
aligned with the centerline of the guiding  
plate, insert the two thumb screws removed in  
5
step  
3
into the holes at the top, and then  
tighten the thumb screws.  
3
3
1 Needle plate spacer  
Loosen the two lower thumb screws.  
2
7
1
2
1 Hole on the sweat guard holder  
2 Centerline of guiding plate  
3 Holes on the top  
• Insert the thumb screws into the holes where  
the cap frame driver that was originally  
installed (holes that the thumb screws were  
removed from in step  
X The movable section of the cap frame driver  
2
on page 171).  
1 Thumb screws  
is secured.  
Using the Optional Cap Frame 185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX —————————————————————————————————————————————————————  
Align the holes on the embroidery frame holder  
with the pins in the frame-mounting plate of the  
carriage.  
6
Additional digitizing  
information  
When creating a pattern for embroidering with a cap  
frame, pay attention to following points in order to  
avoid registration problems (misalignment of gaps in  
the pattern).  
Sew underlay stitches.  
1
1 Pins in the frame-mounting plate  
2 Holes on the embroidery frame holder  
Secure the embroidery frame holder with the two  
thumb screws.  
7
Start the embroidery pattern from the center,  
and sew toward the ends.  
2
With PR-600II, the order in which patterns are  
selected when they are combined is the order  
in which they will be sewn. For the following  
example, select the patterns in the order  
“E””A””B””R” to make the combined  
pattern “BEAR”.  
1 Use the thumb screws included with the machine  
(thumb screws removed in step  
1
on page 171).  
Incorrect  
sewing  
order  
CAUTION  
Using the disc-shaped screwdriver  
included, firmly tighten the thumb  
screws.  
Correct  
sewing  
order  
Note  
Do NOT sew from one end to the other,  
otherwise wrinkling or shrinking may occur.  
186  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When sewing outlines of patterns, make sure  
that the stitch width of the satin stitching is at  
least 2 mm, and that the stitching over-laps  
the fabric by at least 1 mm. Also, make sure  
that there are no jumps of long stitches in the  
outlining on each region or letter.  
3
1 At least 1 mm  
2 At least 2 mm  
CAUTION  
Don’t sew more than four overlapping  
layers.  
7
1 Specify that overlapping areas not be sewn.  
Using the Optional Cap Frame 187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX —————————————————————————————————————————————————————  
Using the Optional Bobbin Winder  
When winding the bobbin thread onto a metal bobbin, use the optional bobbin winder. The procedures for  
using the optional bobbin winder are described below.  
Precautions  
For precautions concerning the power supply, refer to page 14.  
CAUTION  
Be sure to place the bobbin winder on a level, stable surface.  
Only use the bobbins supplied with this bobbin winder.  
Optional bobbin winder and its accessories  
Check that the following bobbin winder and accessories are enclosed.  
1.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
2
3
4
5
5.  
1
9.  
1 Main power switch  
2 Bobbin winder shaft  
3 Hole for thread guide  
4 Hole for spool pin  
5 DC input connector  
6.  
7.  
8.  
10.  
No.  
Name  
Parts Code  
No.  
Name  
Parts Code  
X59354-151(UK)  
LN2284-001  
(USA/CANADA)  
XA0070-151(Europe)  
XC9548-051  
1
Bobbin winder  
XC6598-051  
6
Power supply cord  
(Australia)  
2
3
4
Spool pin  
Spool cushion  
Thread guide  
XC5949-051  
XA0679-050  
XC6644-051  
XC6643-051  
7
8
9
Metal bobbins (5)  
Spool cap  
Weight (L)  
100376-053  
130012-054  
XC5974-151  
5
AC adapter  
10  
Weight (S)  
XC6631-051  
XD0318-051(Europe)  
* The parts code of the bobbin winder set may differ depending on the area where the machine was purchased.  
188  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connecting the AC adapter  
Setting up the optional  
bobbin winder  
Insert the plug of the power supply cord into  
1
Attach the spool pin, spool cushion and thread guide  
to the bobbin winder.  
the AC adapter.  
Insert the spool pin and the spool cushion.  
Lower the holder, and then insert the spool pin  
1
straight into the hole. And insert the spool  
cushion.  
4
Plug the cord on the AC adapter into the DC  
input connector of the bobbin winder, and  
then insert the plug of the power supply cord  
into a household electrical outlet.  
2
1
2
3
1 Spool pin  
2 Spool pin holder  
3 Hole for spool pin  
4 Spool cushion  
• Be sure to firmly insert the plug on the AC  
adapter into the DC input connector of the  
bobbin winder.  
Insert the thread guide.  
Insert the thread guide straight into the hole  
with the pins on the thread guide aligned with  
the notches on the sides of the hole.  
2
CAUTION  
Be sure to use the included AC adapter.  
Using any other AC adapter may result in  
damage.  
Before connecting or disconnecting the  
AC adapter, be sure that the unit is not  
operating.  
1
After using the bobbin winder,  
disconnect it from the electrical outlet.  
2
7
3
1 Pins on thread guide  
2 Notches on hole for thread guide  
3 Hole for thread guide  
• Firmly insert the thread guide as far as  
possible and make sure that it is secure.  
Using the Optional Bobbin Winder 189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX —————————————————————————————————————————————————————  
Winding the bobbin  
Note  
When using a small spool, remove the  
spool cushion and set the spool directly  
onto the spool pin. Also use the included  
spool cap to keep the small spool stable.  
Prepare the bobbin and the spool of bobbin thread.  
Use cotton or spun polyester bobbin thread (from 74  
dtex/2 to 100 dtex/2).  
Pass the thread through the hole in the left of  
the thread guide toward the front of the  
winder.  
3
1
Align the groove in the bobbin with the spring  
on the bobbin winder shaft, and set the  
1
bobbin on the shaft.  
1 Hole in the thread guide  
2
Pass the thread around the tension disk as  
shown in the illustration. Make sure that the  
thread is correctly fed into the tension disk.  
4
1
1 Groove in the bobbin  
2 Spring on the shaft  
Set the thread spool on the spool pin.  
2
1
2
1 Tension disk  
1 Thread spool  
2 Spool pin  
190  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pass the thread through the hole in the right of  
the thread guide toward the back of the  
machine.  
5
Note  
Be sure to follow the procedure described.  
If the bobbin is wound without the thread  
being cut with the cutter, when the bobbin  
thread runs low, the thread may become  
tangled around the bobbin and cause the  
needle to break.  
1
Slide the bobbin holder, until it clicks into  
place.  
8
1
1 Hole in the thread guide  
Wind the thread clockwise around the bobbin  
4 or 5 times, as shown in the illustration.  
6
1 Bobbin holder  
Press the main power switch to start winding  
the bobbin.  
9
Pass the end of the thread through the guide  
slit in the bobbin winder seat, and pull the  
thread. The cutter will cut the thread.  
7
2
7
X Start winding the bobbin.  
1
1 Guide slit  
2 Bobbin winder seat  
Using the Optional Bobbin Winder 191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX —————————————————————————————————————————————————————  
The bobbin will stop rotating automatically  
when it is done winding, and the bobbin  
holder will return to its original position.  
CAUTION  
0
Check that the bobbin thread has been  
wound correctly, otherwise the needle  
may break or the thread tension will be  
incorrect.  
Be sure to clean the bobbin case each  
time that the bobbin is changed. Thread  
wax and dust easily collect around the  
hole in the tension-adjusting spring on  
the bobbin case, resulting in an incorrect  
thread tension. For details, refer to  
“Cleaning the bobbin case” on page 195.  
Be sure to check the tension of the  
bobbin thread each time that the bobbin  
is changed.  
Remove the bobbin.  
a
Depending on the bobbin thread type,  
the tension of the bobbin thread may  
differ. Be sure to check the tension of the  
bobbin thread and adjust the tension if  
necessary.  
For a metal bobbin, use both weights,  
large (L) and small (S).  
For detailed instructions on how to adjust  
the bobbin tension, refer to page 85.  
Note  
When removing the bobbin, do not pull on  
the bobbin winder seat. Doing so could  
loosen or remove the bobbin winder seat,  
resulting in damage to the bobbin winder.  
Pull the thread through the guide slit in the  
bobbin winder seat to cut the thread with the  
cutter.  
b
1
2
1 Weight (L) (Parts Code: XC5974-151)  
2 Weight (S) (Parts Code: XC6631-051)  
If bobbin winding is stopped before it is finished:  
The bobbin winder stops automatically if the  
thread does not feed, for example, if it becomes  
tangled on the spool pin. If this occurs, correctly  
thread the bobbin winder, and then wind the  
bobbin correctly.  
192  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Maintenance  
Simple embroidery machine maintenance operations are described below. Always keep the machine clean,  
otherwise malfunctions may occur.  
Cleaning the LCD  
Cleaning the hook  
If the surface of the LCD is dirty, lightly wipe it with a  
soft dry cloth. Do not use organic cleansers or  
detergents.  
Periodically remove lint and dust for better  
performance from Hook race area.  
Use the included cleaning brush.  
Turn off the embroidery machine.  
Cleaning the machine surface  
1
If the surface of the machine is slightly dirty, wipe it  
with a soft dry cloth. If the machine is heavily dirty,  
lightly soak a cloth in neutral detergent, squeeze it  
out firmly, and then wipe the surface of the machine.  
After cleaning it once with a wet cloth, wipe it again  
with a dry cloth.  
CAUTION  
Unplug the power supply cord before  
cleaning the machine, otherwise injuries  
or an electric shock may occur.  
CAUTION  
Unplug the power supply cord before  
cleaning the machine, otherwise injuries  
or an electric shock may occur.  
Note  
Do not use chemical products, such as  
benzene or thinner.  
Open the hook cover, and remove the bobbin  
2
case. (Refer to page 18.)  
7
Maintenance 193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX —————————————————————————————————————————————————————  
Use the included cleaning brush to remove  
any lint and dust from the hook and its  
surrounding area.  
3
Cleaning around the needle  
plate  
If lint and dust collect around the moving knife, the  
fixed knife or the thread retaining plate, the thread  
may not be cut correctly or various parts of the  
machine may be damaged. Make sure to clean  
around the needle plate once a month.  
Use on offset screwdriver and the included cleaning  
brush.  
Turn off the embroidery machine.  
1
CAUTION  
If the hook is scratched or damaged,  
consult your authorized dealer.  
After cleaning is finished, insert the bobbin  
case into the hook, and then close the hook  
4
cover. (Refer to page 19.)  
CAUTION  
Unplug the power supply cord before  
cleaning the machine, otherwise injuries  
or an electric shock may occur.  
Remove the needle plate.  
With an offset screwdriver, loosen the screws,  
2
and then remove the needle plate.  
1
1 Needle plate  
194  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Use the included cleaning brush to remove  
any lint and dust from the moving knife, the  
fixed knife, the thread retaining plate, and  
their surrounding areas.  
3
Cleaning the bobbin case  
Thread wax and dust easily collect around the hole  
in the tension-adjusting spring on the bobbin case,  
resulting in an incorrect thread tension. Therefore, it  
should be cleaned each time when the bobbin is  
changed.  
Use a piece of paper with the thickness of a business  
card.  
Open the hook cover, remove the bobbin  
case, and then remove the bobbin. (Refer to  
1
page 18.)  
1
1 Remove all lint in this area  
After cleaning is finished, attach the needle  
plate in the opposite way that it was removed  
4
Slide the paper under the tension-adjusting  
spring to remove any dust.  
in step  
2
.
2
Use a corner of the paper to remove any dust  
from around the hole.  
1
7
1 Needle plate  
1 Tension-adjusting spring  
2 Hole  
3 Paper  
Maintenance 195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX —————————————————————————————————————————————————————  
Oiling the machine  
Note  
Do not bend the tension-adjusting spring. In  
addition, do not use anything other than  
thick paper or paper of the specified  
thickness to clean the bobbin case.  
In order to extend the life of the embroidery  
machine’s parts and keep the machine operating  
correctly, be sure to oil the machine before the first  
time that it is used.  
Afterward, put a drop of oil onto the hook once a day  
before use, and put a drop of oil to the lower needle  
bar felt washer every 40 to 50 hours of machine use.  
Use the enclosed cleaning brush to remove  
any lint and dust from inside the bobbin case.  
3
Oiling the race  
Turn off the embroidery machine.  
1
After cleaning is finished, insert the bobbin  
into the bobbin case and the bobbin case into  
the hook, and then close the hook cover.  
(Refer to page 19.)  
4
CAUTION  
Unplug the power supply cord before  
cleaning the machine, otherwise injuries  
or an electric shock may occur.  
Open the hook cover, and remove the bobbin  
case. (Refer to page 19.)  
2
196  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Rotate the handwheel (about 50 degrees) to  
move the race of the hook to a position where  
it can easily be oiled.  
Oiling the needle bars  
3
From embroidering screen, select one needle bar  
at a time. Pull down the selected needle bar and  
lock into position (refer to page 72). Put one drop  
of oil on the lower needle bar felt washer.  
1
1 Handwheel  
• Be sure to rotate the handwheel  
counterclockwise.  
Put a drop of oil onto the hook.  
1
4
1
1 Apply oil here.  
• Too much oil may drip onto sewing project.  
Note  
Put a drop of oil onto the hook once a day  
before use.  
2
Apply one drop of oil on the lower needle  
bar felt washer every 40 – 50 hours of  
sewing time.  
Apply only sewing machine oil. Use of any  
other type of oil may result in damage to the  
embroidery machine.  
1 Punch a small hole in oil bottle.  
2 Apply oil here.  
• Use a pointed object to punch a small hole  
in the tip of the enclosed oiler before using  
it.  
Do not apply too much oil. Fabric or thread  
may get contaminated. If too much oil is  
applied, wipe off any excess with a rag.  
If the thread breaks while sewing or the  
operating noise of the hook becomes loud,  
apply oil onto the race hook.  
After oiling, insert the bobbin case into the  
hook, and then close the hook cover. (Refer to  
page 18.)  
5
7
Maintenance 197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX —————————————————————————————————————————————————————  
Troubleshooting  
Check the items that are displayed.  
4
On-screen troubleshooting  
This embroidery machine is equipped with an easy-  
to-use troubleshooting feature for problems during  
sewing. Touch the key that shows the problem, and  
then check for the causes that are displayed.  
Touch  
.
1
2
3
After checking the desired information, touch  
.
5
Touch  
.
Touch  
.
6
Touch the key that contains a description of  
the problem.  
X The screen that was displayed before  
was touched appears.  
198  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
If the machine does not operate correctly, check for the following points/issues before requesting service.  
If the suggested remedy does not correct the problem, contact your authorized dealer.  
Symptom  
Probable Cause  
Remedy  
Reference Page  
The machine is not turned ON.  
The machine has not been  
Turn on the embroidery machine.  
p.20  
The embroidery  
Touch the unlock key.  
p.42  
p.42  
p.63  
machine does not unlocked.  
operate.  
The start/stop button was not  
pressed.  
With the machine unlocked,  
press the start/stop button.  
The needle is not installed  
correctly.  
Correctly install the needle.  
Use the Allen screw driver to  
securely tighten the needle set  
screw.  
The needle set screw is loose.  
p.63  
Replace the needle with a new  
one.  
The needle is bent or blunt.  
p.15, 63  
The area around the hole in the  
needle plate is damaged.  
1
Replace the needle plate.  
Consult your nearest authorized  
dealer.  
The needle  
breaks.  
1 Scratches/Burrs  
The needle hits/touchs the  
needle plate.  
1
2
Replace needle.  
Consult your nearest authorized  
dealer.  
3
1 Needle  
2 Hole in needle plate  
3 Needle hits hole  
7
The presser foot is set too high  
and not correctly positioned.  
The needle hits/touches the  
presser foot.  
Consult your nearest authorized  
dealer.  
Troubleshooting 199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX —————————————————————————————————————————————————————  
Symptom  
Probable Cause  
Remedy  
Reference Page  
The area around the embroidery  
foot hole is damaged.  
Replace the presser foot.  
Consult your nearest authorized  
dealer.  
1
1 Scratches or Burrs  
Sliding surface on hook race is  
not smooth. There are scratches  
or burrs on it.  
1
Consult your nearest authorized  
dealer.  
1 Hook race area  
The hook is not correctly  
installed.  
Consult your nearest authorized  
dealer.  
The hook stopper is not  
correctly installed, the hook is  
making a complete rotation.  
The needle  
breaks.  
Consult your nearest authorized  
dealer.  
Pull the upper thread by hand  
from below the presser foot, and  
check that the thread moves  
smoothly. If the thread does not  
move, it is not threaded  
correctly. Thread the upper  
thread correctly. Make sure the  
thread is caught by the needle  
bar thread guide.  
The upper thread is not threaded  
correctly.  
The upper thread is catching  
somewhere.  
p.35-38  
Decrease the upper thread  
tension and make sure tension  
disc rotate when pulling on  
thread.  
The upper thread tension is set  
too high. It does not run.  
p.86  
p.15  
A bobbin designed specifically  
for this machine is not used.  
Use the correct bobbin.  
Hook timing may be OFF.  
Consult your nearest authorized  
dealer.  
The needle and the hook are not  
correctly passing each other.  
There is backlash play (forward/  
backward) in the needle bar  
case.  
Consult your nearest authorized  
dealer.  
The thread density of the  
embroidery data is too fine.  
Three or more overlapping  
stitches are being sewn.  
Using a data design system,  
correct the thread density and  
overstitching settings in the  
embroidery data.  
p.100  
200  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Symptom  
Probable Cause  
Remedy  
Reference Page  
The needle is not correctly  
installed .  
Correctly install the needle.  
p.63  
Use the Allen screw driver to  
tighten the needle set screw.  
The needle set screw is loose.  
The needle is bent or blunt.  
p.63  
Replace the needle with a new  
one.  
p.15, 63  
The area around the hole in the  
needle plate is damaged.  
1
Replace the needle plate or  
consult your nearest authorized  
dealer.  
1 Scratches/Burrs  
The needle is touching the  
needle plate.  
1
2
The upper thread  
breaks.  
Consult your nearest authorized  
dealer.  
3
1 Needle  
2 Needle plate hole  
3 Needle touching hole  
The presser foot is set too high  
and not correctly positioned.  
The needle hits/touches the  
presser foot.  
Consult your nearest authorized  
dealer.  
The area around the embroidery  
foot hole is damaged.  
Replace the presser foot.  
Consult your nearest authorized  
dealer.  
1
7
1 Scratches/Burrs  
Using a weak thread like a  
metallic thread.  
Slow down the machine sewing  
speed.  
p.91  
Troubleshooting 201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX —————————————————————————————————————————————————————  
Symptom  
Probable Cause  
Remedy  
Reference Page  
Sliding surface on hook is not  
smooth. There are burns on it.  
1
Consult your nearest authorized  
dealer.  
1 Hook race area  
Remove the loose thread. If the  
thread is tangled in the hook,  
clean the hook.  
The thread is loose in the hook  
area.  
p.193  
The play between the hook and Consult your nearest authorized  
the race is too much.  
dealer.  
The hook does not rotate  
smoothly.  
Remove lint, and clean and  
apply oil.  
p.193, 196  
The space between the hook  
stopper and the hook cannot be  
adjusted.  
Consult your nearest authorized  
dealer.  
The upper thread is not threaded  
correctly.  
Pull the upper thread by hand  
from below the presser foot, and  
check that the thread moves  
smoothly. If the thread does not  
move smoothly, it is not  
correctly threaded.  
The upper thread  
breaks.  
p.35-38  
p.36-37  
Un-thread the machine and  
re-thread the machine.  
Make sure the thread is correctly  
positioned in the needle bar  
thread guide.  
Make sure thread passes  
completely under upper and  
middle thread guide.  
Upper thread is not positioned  
in upper or middle thread guide.  
There are knots or tangles in the  
thread.  
Remove any knots or tangles.  
The upper thread tension is too  
high.  
Decrease the upper thread  
tension.  
p.86  
p.85  
p.15  
The lower thread tension is  
incorrect.  
The thread does not roll out of  
the bobbin case smoothly.  
Adjust the lower thread tension.  
Replace the bobbin case with a  
new one.  
The bobbin case is damaged.  
Check that the bobbin is wound  
so that it about 80% full and that  
the thread is evenly wound. If  
the bobbin is not correctly  
wound, replace the bobbin with  
one that is correctly wound or  
rewind the bobbin.  
The bobbin thread is not wound  
correctly.  
p.15  
p.15  
A bobbin designed specifically  
for this machine is not used.  
Use the correct bobbin.  
202  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Symptom  
Probable Cause  
Remedy  
Reference Page  
The automatic needle-threading Consult your nearest authorized  
mechanism is broken.  
dealer.  
Adhesive is attached to the  
needle.  
Replace the needle.  
p.63  
Firmly set the fabric in the  
embroidery frame so that it is  
taut.  
The fabric is not taut.  
p.28, 67  
The thread quality is too weak  
due to age of thread. Replace  
thread.  
The thread quality is poor.  
The upper thread  
breaks.  
The embroidery data contains  
stitches with a pitch of zero.  
Delete all stitches with a zero  
pitch.  
p.150  
p.150  
The embroidery data contains  
many stitches with an extremely  
small pitch.  
Delete all stitches with a small  
pitch.  
The thread density of the  
embroidery data is too fine.  
Three or more overlapping  
stitches are being sewn.  
Using a data design system,  
correct the thread density and  
overstitching settings in the  
embroidery data.  
p.100  
p.19  
The bobbin thread is not  
correctly threaded.  
Correctly thread the bobbin  
thread.  
The bobbin is scratched or does  
not rotate smoothly.  
Replace the bobbin.  
p.18  
p.18  
The bobbin  
thread breaks.  
The bobbin case is damaged.  
Replace the bobbin case.  
Remove the thread jammed and  
clean the hook.  
The thread is tangled.  
p.193  
A bobbin designed specifically  
for this machine is not used.  
Use the correct bobbin.  
p.15  
p.35  
The upper thread is not threaded Thread the upper thread  
correctly.  
correctly.  
Replace the needle with a new  
one.  
The needle is bent or blunt.  
p.15, 63  
p.63  
The needle is not installed  
correctly.  
Correctly install the needle.  
Stitches are  
skipped.  
Dust has accumulated under the Clean the hook and the needle  
needle plate or in the hook. plate.  
p.193, 194  
The needle and the hook are not Consult your nearest authorized  
correctly passing each other.  
dealer.  
Improper twisting results in  
irregular loop formation. Try  
using a new spool.  
The thread twist is either too  
tight or too loose.  
Use tweezers to remove any  
tangled thread from the hook.  
The thread is tangled.  
7
If the fabric is not taut, the  
The fabric is not well framed in  
the embroidery frame (for  
example, the fabric is not taut).  
pattern may become misaligned  
or the stitching may shrink. Be  
sure to correctly frame the fabric  
in the embroidery frame.  
The embroidery  
pattern is  
misaligned.  
p.28, 67  
p.65  
The embroidery frame is too  
large for the size of the  
embroidery.  
Use an embroidery frame that  
matches the size of the  
embroidery.  
Troubleshooting 203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX —————————————————————————————————————————————————————  
Symptom  
Probable Cause  
Remedy  
Reference Page  
Use stabilizer (backing) when  
embroidering on thin or stretch  
fabrics, fabrics with a coarse  
weave or fabrics that easily  
allow the stitching to shrink.  
<When using the optional cap  
frame>  
Use hard stabilizer when  
embroidering on a cap made of  
soft material.  
Stabilizer (backing) is not used.  
p.66  
Correctly attach the embroidery  
frame to the carriage. Make sure  
that the pins on the left and right  
arms of the embroidery frame  
holder securely fit into the holes  
in the handles on the  
The embroidery frame is not  
correctly attached to the  
carriage.  
p.30  
embroidery frame.  
The pattern may become  
misaligned if the carriage or  
embroidery frame is hitting  
objects. Make sure that there are  
no objects within the operating  
field of the embroidery frame.  
The carriage or the embroidery  
frame is hitting objects.  
The embroidery  
pattern is  
misaligned.  
Stop the machine, and then  
correctly position the fabric.  
The fabric is caught or pinched.  
The pattern may become  
misaligned if the presser foot  
was hit or the carriage was  
moved while replacing bobbin  
thread, changing needle, or  
working near embroidery frame.  
Be careful when removing and  
reattaching the embroidery  
frame while replacing bobbin  
thread, changing needle, or  
working near embroidery frame.  
If the carriage is moved, turn the  
machine off, then on again. The  
correct frame position at the  
time that the machine was  
stopped is stored in the  
The carriage moved while  
removing embroidery frame.  
machine’s memory, and the  
embroidery frame is returned to  
the correct position.  
The design may need more pull  
compensation or underlay to  
accommodate stretchy or high-  
napped fabrics.  
The design was not digitized  
correctly.  
The upper thread tension is low.  
After passing the upper thread  
through the hole in the presser  
foot, pull the thread by hand to  
check the thread tension. If it is  
difficult to determine, compare  
it with other needle bars where  
looping does not occur.  
There are loops in  
the upper thread.  
p.86  
204  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Symptom  
Probable Cause  
Remedy  
Reference Page  
If the thread tension cannot be  
adjusted, thread wax and dust  
may have collected in the upper  
or middle thread guide plates,  
causing the thread tension guide  
plates to rise. Clean the thread  
tension guide plates.  
The thread tension does not  
correspond to the amount that  
the thread tension knob was  
tightened.  
There are loops in  
the upper thread.  
Try sewing with different thread.  
If the problem no longer occurs  
after the thread is changed, the  
thread quality is the problem.  
Replace the thread with one of  
good quality.  
The thread quality is poor.  
Lint may be wound in the hook. Clean the hook.  
p.193  
p.35  
The upper thread is not threaded Check the thread path, and then  
correctly.  
thread the upper thread again.  
The machine is  
noisy.  
Replace the hook.  
Consult your nearest authorized  
dealer.  
The hook is damaged.  
Not enough oil was applied.  
Oil recommended parts.  
p.196  
p.40  
Touch the key to move the  
desired needle bar to be  
threaded into embroidering  
position.  
The needle is not at the correct  
position.  
Recommended needles are not  
used on this machine.  
Replace and use recommended  
needle.  
The needle  
threader cannot  
be used.  
p.15, 63  
p.15, 63  
The needle is not installed  
correctly.  
Correctly install the needle.  
The hook on the automatic  
needle-threading mechanism is  
bent.  
Consult your nearest authorized  
dealer.  
p.15, 63  
The upper thread is not threaded Check the thread path, and then  
p.35  
p.19  
p.85  
correctly.  
thread the upper thread again.  
The thread  
tension is  
incorrect.  
The bobbin thread is not  
correctly threaded.  
Correctly thread the bobbin  
thread.  
The lower thread tension is  
incorrect.  
Adjust the tension of the bobbin  
thread.  
The upper thread  
comes out of the  
needle when  
embroidering  
begins.  
If a short length of thread  
remains after the thread is  
trimmed, the needle may  
become unthreaded when  
embroidering begins again.  
Set the remaining length of  
thread to “LONG TAIL” on the  
second page of the settings  
screen.  
p.150  
p.19  
The upper thread  
does not reach the bobbin, the thread does not feed  
bobbin thread  
when  
embroidering  
begins.  
There is no more thread in the  
7
from the bobbin, or the thread  
that is fed from the bobbin is too thread.  
short.  
Correctly thread the lower  
Troubleshooting 205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX —————————————————————————————————————————————————————  
Symptom  
Probable Cause  
Remedy  
Reference Page  
If the thread breakage sensor in  
the thread tension disc of the  
thread tension knobs cannot  
detect that the thread is being  
fed, even if the machine is  
Correctly pass the thread  
through the thread tension disc.  
If the broken thread error occurs  
after the machine is rethreaded,  
the sensor may be damaged.  
Consult your nearest authorized  
dealer.  
Although the  
thread is not  
broken, a broken  
thread error  
running, a broken thread error  
occurs and the machine is  
p.37  
occurs and the  
machine stops.  
stopped. If the thread came out  
of the thread tension disc, even  
though the thread is not broken,  
the machine detects that the  
thread is not being fed and stops.  
Replace the needle. Dull  
needles have a difficult time  
passing through the garment,  
causing fabrics to tear.  
The needle is dull.  
p.15, 63  
p.167  
There are needle  
cuts or holes in  
the garment.  
The simple penetration of the  
needle could damage delicate  
fabrics. Use stabilizer on top of  
fabric.  
The fabric is too delicate.  
Adjust the tension according to  
the type of fabric and thread  
being used. Polyester thread will  
stretch during sewing especially  
if the tensions are set too high.  
After the stitching is complete,  
the thread returns to its original  
strength, causing puckers in the  
fabric.  
The thread tension is too tight.  
p.86  
Tightly frame non-stretchable,  
woven fabrics. Loose framing  
will cause the fabric to bunch  
up under the stitching.  
Tautly frame soft knits using a  
stable backing. Overstretching  
the garment will cause it to look  
puckered when the frame is  
removed.  
The framing tension of the fabric  
is incorrect.  
p.166  
There is  
puckering in the  
fabric.  
Re-digitize the design with fill  
stitching or with multiple rows  
of column stitching.  
The column stitches are too  
long.  
Dull needles push fabric down  
and damage material. Replace  
the needle.  
The needle is dull.  
p.15, 63  
p.142  
Too many stitches in an area  
pull fabric, causing it to pucker.  
Slightly decrease the design  
density by 5% to 10%.  
The design density is too heavy.  
The LCD contrast is incorrect.  
The LCD cannot  
be read.  
Adjust the contrast on the LCD.  
CAUTION  
This machine is equipped with a thread detecting mechanism. If the machine is not threaded  
with the upper thread, the machine will not operate correctly, even if the start/stop button is  
pressed after unlocking the machine.  
If the machine suddenly stops:  
- Turn off the machine, and unplug the power cord.  
- Restart the machine with the correct operating procedure. Refer to page 20.  
206  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error messages  
If the start/stop button is pressed while the machine is not correctly set up or if an incorrect operation is  
performed, the machine stops and informs you of the error with a buzzer and an error message. If an error  
message appears, correct the problem according to the instructions in the message.  
To close the message, touch  
or perform the correct operation, then touch  
. If the message  
appears again, consult your nearest authorized dealer.  
The pattern extends out of the  
200 mm (H) × 300 mm (W)  
embroidering area.  
Move the pattern into the  
embroidering area.  
The installed embroidery frame  
There are too many characters  
to be arranged on the curve.  
Reduce the number of charac-  
ters.  
is too small.  
Check which embroidery  
frames can be used, and then  
install a larger embroidery  
frame. (Refer to page 28.)  
The upper thread was cut or  
the thread came out the thread  
tension disc or a thread guide.  
The machine is not threaded  
correctly.  
The bobbin thread was broken  
or ran out.  
The machine couldn't delete  
the data.  
The media may be damaged.  
Check that there is thread on  
the bobbin and that approxi-  
mately 50 mm (2 inches) of  
thread has been pulled out, and  
then re-install the bobbin.  
(Refer to page 19.)  
Check that the thread is under  
the upper and middle thread  
guides and correctly thread the  
upper thread.  
(Refer to page 35.)  
7
Patterns on the embroidery  
card cannot be read.  
The embroidery card may be  
damaged.  
Characters have been com-  
bined until they extend out of  
the embroidery frame.  
Decrease the number of charac-  
ters so that they fit within the  
embroidery frame.  
Six manual needle bar settings  
were being specified.  
No more than five needle bars  
can be specified.  
Troubleshooting 207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX —————————————————————————————————————————————————————  
Sewing cannot begin from the  
specified starting position.  
Change the starting position or  
move the frame and change the  
embroidering position. (Refer to  
page 89.)  
The needle has stopped at an  
incorrect position.  
Turn the handwheel so that the  
mark on the handwheel is at the  
top.  
More than 101 patterns are  
being combined.  
Reduce the number of patterns  
combined. Up to 101 patterns  
can be combined.  
The needle bar case cannot be  
moved to its initial position.  
The needle bar case has  
stopped at an incorrect posi-  
tion.  
The needle bar case motor is  
locked.  
Touch  
to automatically  
Touch  
to automatically  
Touch  
to automatically  
reset the needle bar case.  
reset the needle bar case.  
reset the needle bar case.  
The automatic needle-thread-  
ing mechanism did not operate  
correctly.  
Another operation was per-  
formed while the automatic  
needle-threading mechanism  
was threading the needle.  
Press the automatic needle  
threading button, and then per-  
form the other operation after  
the needle is threaded. (Refer to  
page 39.)  
The USB media's memory  
capacity is exceeded to the  
limit.  
There are too many data either  
in the machine or USB media.  
The thread is entangled in the  
automatic needle-threading  
mechanism, remove the thread,  
and then touch  
.
The pattern is too large.  
The memory capacity is  
exceeded to the limit.  
Delete another data and try  
again.  
The thread picker did not oper-  
ate correctly.  
The thread is entangled on the  
thread picker, remove the  
thread.  
Patterns larger than 200 mm (H)  
× 300 mm (W) (7-7/8 inches (H)  
× 11-3/4 inches (W)) cannot be  
used. Reduce the pattern to a  
size smaller than that specified.  
208  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Patterns stored in the  
machine's memory cannot be  
recalled.  
The machine's memory may be  
damaged. Consult your nearest  
authorized dealer.  
The machine couldn't save the  
data.  
Try to use a different media.  
The machine was stopped  
while the needle bar case was  
moving.  
Touch  
to automatically  
reset the needle bar case.  
The pattern is larger than the  
embroidering area of the  
installed embroidery frame.  
Use an embroidery frame with  
an embroidering area that is  
larger than the pattern.  
Thread color that was specified  
is incorrect.  
The thread color number that  
was entered is not in the custom  
thread table setting. Check the  
number, and then try entering  
the number again.  
The USB media is write-pro-  
tected.  
Cancel the write protection.  
The USB media is write-pro-  
tected.  
The USB media was attempted  
to change while it is being  
read.  
Please try again without discon-  
necting.  
was touched while no  
embroidery card is inserted.  
Insert an embroidery card.  
(Refer to page 112.)  
Touch  
, and cancel the  
write protection.  
7
A pattern on an embroidery  
card not compatible with this  
machine was being recalled.  
Some embroidery cards with  
copyrighted patterns cannot be  
used.  
Embroidery data with an  
incompatible version is being  
used.  
Embroidery data that is not  
complete or has an unknown  
version cannot be used.  
The pattern has too many  
stitches and cannot be used.  
Data with stitches that exceed  
specifications (500,000 stitches)  
cannot be displayed. Use data  
design software to reduce the  
number of stitches.  
Troubleshooting 209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX —————————————————————————————————————————————————————  
More than 501 thread color  
changes are being specified in  
the pattern.  
Up to 501 thread color changes  
can be specified in a pattern.  
The embroidery data cannot be  
detected.  
The embroidery data may be  
damaged.  
USB media error  
Touch  
, and try again. Or  
the USB media may be dam-  
aged.  
USB media is not connected to  
the machine.  
Connect a USB media.  
During data transfer, the USB  
cable was disconnected.  
Do not disconnect the USB  
cable while data is being trans-  
ferred. (Refer to page 114.)  
A wiper error occurred.  
The thread is entangled on the  
wiper, remove the thread.  
210  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If any of the following messages appear, consult your nearest authorized dealer.  
7
Troubleshooting 211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX —————————————————————————————————————————————————————  
212  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If the LCD cannot be read  
If the machine does not  
respond when a key is pressed  
If the LCD cannot be read after the machine is turned  
on, adjust the LCD as described below.  
If nothing happens when a key on the screen is  
touched (no key can be selected or the keys are  
misaligned), adjust the touch panel as described  
below.  
While touching anywhere inside the touch  
1
panel turn the machine off, then on again.  
Touch anywhere inside the touch panel, and  
turn the machine off, then on again.  
1
• Continue touching the touch panel until the  
screen shown below appears.  
• The start/stop button does not light up.  
• Continue touching the touch panel until the  
screen shown below appears.  
• The start/stop button does not light up.  
Touch  
and  
to adjust the brightness  
2
of the screen so that the contents of the  
screens can be clearly viewed.  
X The screen shown below appears.  
After making the necessary adjustment, turn  
the machine off, then on again.  
Press the thread trimming button.  
3
2
7
X The adjustments screen appears.  
Troubleshooting 213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX —————————————————————————————————————————————————————  
Use the included touch pen to touch the center  
of the crosses on the screen, from 1 to 5.  
3
CAUTION  
Be sure to use the included touch pen to  
adjust the touch panel. Do not use a  
mechanical pencil, screwdriver or any  
other hard or sharp object. Do not apply  
pressure to the LCD screen display,  
otherwise damage to the display may  
result.  
Touch the center of the crosses in order from  
4
1 to 5. After number 5 is touched, a buzzer  
will sound once to indicate that the  
adjustments were correctly made.  
• If the buzzer sounds twice when cross  
number 5 is touched, an error occurred  
during setting. Touch the crosses again,  
starting from 1 to 5.  
After making the necessary touch panel  
adjustment, turn the machine off, and on  
again.  
5
Note  
If the keys still do not respond, even after  
the touch panel is adjusted, or if the touch  
panel cannot be adjusted, contact your  
nearest authorized dealer.  
214  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
Embroidery machine specifications  
Item  
Specification  
Weight  
37 kg (81 Ibs.).  
Machine size  
Sewing speed  
512(W) x 589(D) x 586 (H) mm (20-5/32 (W) x 23-3/16 (D) x 23-1/16(H) inches)  
Maximum / Tubular: 1,000 spm, Cap: 600 spm  
Speed range / Max.: 1,000 spm, Min.: 400 spm  
Hook Type  
Vertical rotary hook  
Hook size  
Normal size (Type L)  
Needle  
HA130EBBR / #11  
Number of needle  
Thread tension  
Cap sewing  
Tubular sewing  
6 needles  
Manual  
(Option) 130 mm (W) x 50 mm(H) (2 inches (H) x 5-1/8 inches (W))  
(4 frames available)  
300 mm (W) x 200 mm(H) (7-7/8 inches (H) x 11-3/4 inches (W)),  
180 mm (W) x 130 mm(H) (5-1/8 inches (H) x 7-1/8 inches (W)) ,  
100 mm (W) x 100 mm(H) (4 inches (H) x 4 inches (W)),  
60 mm (W) x 40 mm(H) (1-1/2 inches (H) x 2-3/8 inches (W))  
Thread trimming  
Upper and lower thread  
Thread breakage  
sensor  
Yes / Upper thread an bobbin thread  
Automatic needle  
threader  
Yes  
Communication  
with PC  
USB port  
Data storage  
Original card and USB media  
7
Specifications 215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX —————————————————————————————————————————————————————  
Index  
units of measurements ..........................................143  
Checking  
needle bars and thread colors .................................33  
Symbols  
“DST” TRIM SETTING .........................................140, 149  
preview image ........................................................27  
thread spool changes ..............................................75  
thread tension .........................................................45  
A
Accessories .....................................................................4  
Adjusting  
Cleaning  
angle .......................................................................73  
cap frame driver ....................................................173  
edited patterns ......................................................120  
legs ...........................................................................8  
operation panel .........................................................9  
screen brightness ..........................................142, 213  
sewing speed ..........................................................91  
thread tension .........................................................85  
touch panel ...........................................................213  
Alphabet patterns ........................................................109  
Appliqué alphabet .......................................................107  
Appliqué sewing .........................................................156  
Array key .......................................................53, 111, 123  
Arrrow key ............................................................72, 120  
Automatic lock stitch .....................................................88  
Automatic needle-threading button ...........................3, 39  
Automatic needle-threading mechanism .......................39  
around the needle plate ........................................194  
bobbin case ..........................................................195  
hook .....................................................................193  
LCD ......................................................................193  
machine surface ....................................................193  
Color information ........................................................145  
Color thread table .......................................................163  
Combining patterns .....................................................119  
Common screen ............................................................49  
Corduroy .....................................................................167  
Cotton sheeting ...........................................................167  
Custom thread table ............................................141, 147  
D
Delete file key .....................................................112, 118  
Delete key .............................................................53, 110  
Deleting  
pattern ..................................................................128  
previously saved pattern ...............................112, 118  
short stitches .........................................................150  
Denim .........................................................................167  
Density key ...........................................................53, 125  
Display ....................................................................16, 49  
Display expanded color ......................................140, 146  
Display guides .............................................................143  
Distance from center (horizontal) ............................52, 54  
Distance from center (vertical) .................................52, 54  
Dress shirt (woven) ......................................................167  
B
Backing .......................................................................165  
Basic procedures ...........................................................17  
Bobbin ..............................................................15, 18, 19  
Bobbin case ..............................................18, 19, 85, 195  
Bobbin winder ............................................................188  
Brightness of LCD ................................................141, 142  
Buzzer .................................................................141, 142  
C
Cancel key ..............................................................51, 57  
Canton fleece ..............................................................167  
Canvas ........................................................................167  
Cap frame ...................................................................169  
removing ..............................................................184  
Cap frame driver .........................................................171  
adjusting ...............................................................173  
Carriage ..........................................................................2  
Center cursor ...............................................................145  
Centerpoint .................................................................144  
Change thread color key ...........................53, 55, 92, 127  
Changing  
E
Edit end key ..................................................................53  
Edit key ...................................................................50, 55  
Editing ...........................................................25, 119, 129  
combined pattern ..................................................132  
Embroidering  
corner of fabric .......................................................69  
repeating pattern ...................................................130  
small fabric .............................................................69  
tape or ribbon .........................................................69  
Embroidering screen ................................................33, 56  
Embroidering settings screen ...........................26, 54, 129  
Embroidery  
basic method ..........................................................42  
repeatedly sewing ...................................................90  
Embroidery card slot .......................................................3  
Embroidery cards ........................................................112  
Embroidery data ..........................................................100  
Embroidery frame  
character spacing ..................................................124  
color thread table ..................................................149  
colors of the pattern ......................................127, 131  
display guides .......................................................143  
embroidery position ................................................72  
language ...............................................................143  
size .......................................................103, 110, 121  
text arrangement of a character .............................123  
thread color display ..............................................145  
thread density .......................................................125  
thread spools ..........................................................77  
attaching to the machine .........................................30  
hooping ..................................................................28  
removing ................................................................46  
216  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
types .......................................................................65  
Embroidery frame holder  
Mounting jig ................................................................174  
Moving  
installing ...............................................................185  
removing ..............................................................171  
Embroidery frame indicators ..............................28, 52, 54  
Embroidery patterns ....................................................104  
Embroidery position ......................................................72  
Embroidery thread .........................................................35  
Error messages .............................................................207  
needle .....................................................................40  
Multi color key ......................................................53, 126  
N
Names of machine parts ..................................................2  
Needle ..........................................................................15  
changing .................................................................63  
Needle bar case ..............................................................2  
Needle bar key ........................................................34, 56  
Needle plate ................................................................194  
New embroidery key .....................................................49  
Next page key ...............................................................51  
Number of thread color changes .......................51, 52, 54  
F
Fabric ......................................................................16, 69  
removing ................................................................46  
Fabric/stabilizer compatibility chart .............................167  
Features ........................................................................viii  
Feet .................................................................................2  
Floral alphabet patterns ...............................................106  
Forward/Backward stitch key .............................57, 79, 81  
Frame patterns .............................................................108  
Front view .......................................................................2  
O
Oiling ..........................................................................196  
Operation panel ......................................................2, 3, 9  
Optional accessories .......................................................5  
G
P
Golf shirt .....................................................................167  
Golf Style ....................................................................170  
Grid ............................................................................144  
Pattern display area .......................................................49  
Pattern editing screen ......................................25, 52, 119  
Pattern list screen ....................................................23, 51  
Pattern selection key .............................................53, 120  
Pattern size ..............................................................52, 54  
Pattern type selection screen ...................................23, 50  
Positioning key ..........................................53, 55, 72, 120  
Power supply cord ..................................................20, 47  
Power supply plug ...........................................................3  
Preview key .......................................................51, 53, 55  
Previewing the Image ....................................................27  
Previous page key .........................................................51  
Principal parts .........................................................2, 151  
H
Handwheel .............................................................3, 197  
Headwear ...................................................................167  
Help key ...............................................................49, 153  
Hook ...........................................................................193  
Hook cover/Hook ............................................................2  
Hooping ..........................................................28, 67, 166  
Horizontal mirror image key ...................51, 53, 103, 121  
I
Q
Industrial embroidery frame ........................................168  
Quit key ........................................................................55  
J
R
Jump code ...................................................................149  
Region display ...............................................................56  
Remaining length ........................................................150  
Renaissance Alphabet Patterns ....................................105  
Repeat key ............................................................55, 130  
Repeat spacing (horizontal) ...................................54, 131  
Repeat spacing (vertical) ........................................54, 131  
Reserve stop key ................................................57, 92, 94  
Reserved needle ....................................................96, 141  
Retrieving  
from Computer (USB) ............................................114  
from Embroidery cards ..........................................112  
from memory ........................................................111  
from USB media ...................................................117  
Right-side/rear view .........................................................3  
Rotate all key ..................................................55, 73, 129  
Rotate key .............................................................53, 122  
Rotation angle .........................................................52, 54  
L
Language .............................................................141, 143  
LCD ....................................................3, 16, 49, 142, 213  
Lingerie .......................................................................167  
Lock stitching key ....................................................55, 88  
Locking mechanism ......................................................42  
Locking the needle bar ..................................................72  
Low Profile (Low fitting) ..............................................170  
Lower thread guide .........................................................2  
7
M
Machine operations guide key ...............................49, 151  
Main power switch ..............................................3, 20, 47  
Maintenance .......................................................151, 193  
Manual needle bar settings ............................................96  
Maximum sewing speed key ...................................55, 56  
Merge key .....................................................................53  
Middle thread guide ........................................................2  
Index 217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
APPENDIX —————————————————————————————————————————————————————  
Troubleshooting ..................................................151, 198  
T-shirt ..........................................................................167  
S
Satin jacket ..................................................................167  
Screen .........................................................16, 21, 22, 49  
Selecting  
U
edited pattern ........................................................120  
embroidery pattern .........................................23, 102  
Set key ..........................................................................51  
Setting up ........................................................................6  
Settings key ...........................................................49, 140  
Sewing  
Units of measurements ........................................141, 143  
Unlock key ..............................................................42, 57  
Upper thread guide .........................................................2  
Upper threading ............................................................33  
USB host .........................................................................3  
USB media ..........................................................117, 137  
USB port connector .........................................................3  
appliqué ...............................................................156  
pattern aligned with a mark on the fabric ..............161  
Sewing key ....................................................................55  
Sewing light ....................................................................2  
Sewing order .................................................................56  
Sewing speed ................................................................91  
Sewing the embroidery ..................................................42  
Sewing time ..................................................................56  
Short stitch delete ................................................140, 150  
Silk ..............................................................................167  
Six-needle machine ......................................................viii  
Size (horizontal) ......................................................51, 52  
Size (vertical) ...........................................................51, 52  
Size key ...................................................51, 53, 103, 121  
Spacing key ...........................................................53, 124  
Specifications ..............................................................215  
Spool .............................................................................36  
Spool change indicator ............................................56, 76  
Spool stand ...............................................................2, 11  
Stabilizer .......................................................66, 165, 167  
Standard Tail .......................................................140, 150  
Standard(Pro Style) ......................................................170  
Start/stop button ........................................................3, 42  
Starting/ending position key ..............................55, 89, 90  
Stitch count ...................................................................56  
Stopping embroidering ..................................................44  
Store key .......................................................................55  
Sweater knit ................................................................167  
Sweatshirt ....................................................................167  
V
Ventilation slots ...............................................................3  
Version ........................................................................140  
Vertical mirror image key ........................51, 53, 103, 121  
T
Tajima data .................................................101, 149, 163  
Temporary needle bar setting key ............................57, 94  
Tension dial ............................................................45, 86  
Terry cloth ...................................................................167  
Thread .......................................................15, 16, 35, 164  
Thread color ................................................131, 146, 163  
Thread color display ....................................................145  
Thread color set up display ...........................................56  
Thread guide .............................................................2, 36  
Thread guide assembly support .......................................2  
Thread guide pins ............................................................2  
Thread spools ................................................................77  
Thread tension ......................................................85, 192  
Thread tension disc .......................................................37  
Thread tension knobs ................................................2, 86  
Thread trimming button .............................................3, 44  
Threading  
needle .....................................................................39  
upper thread .....................................................33, 35  
Touch panel ....................................................................3  
Trial sewing key ......................................................32, 55  
218  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Index 219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
English  
884-T03  
XD1133-0511  
0512  
Printed in Taiwan  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Black Box Computer Hardware LE1501A R2LE1502A R3 User Manual
Black Decker Vacuum Cleaner 90521333 User Manual
Boss Audio Systems Car Amplifier BVAM5 User Manual
Brother Sewing Machine EX 660 User Manual
Cambridge Audio DVD Player Azur 540D V2 User Manual
Canon All in One Printer 4350B001 User Manual
Casablanca Fan Company Home Theater Server W 85 User Manual
C Crane Portable Radio CCRadio User Manual
Cerwin Vega Car Amplifier CV 1800 User Manual
Cisco Systems IP Phone SPA301 User Manual